OWNER’S MANUAL

2014 JOURNEY

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

DA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea-
s Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on
to be deleted and the name Chrysler this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
ution therefore. features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
he most frequent causes of acci- vehicle.

eriously impaired with blood alcohol Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
minimum. If you are drinking, don’t design and specifications, and/or make additions to or im-
ed non-drinking driver, call a cab, a provements to its products without imposing any obligation
ortation. upon itself to install them on products previously manufac-
tured.

ARNING!
n lead to an accident. Your per-
our reflexes are slower, and your
en you have been drinking. Never
Copyright © 2013 Chrysler Group LLC

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE

1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfac-
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all tion.
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint contains the information you desire.
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
tions and recommendations in this manual will help The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. this Owner’s Manual:

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INTRODUCTION 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from VIN Location
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears stamped on the right front door sill
under the sill moulding and printed on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.

Stamped VIN Location

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS 2
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .14 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .18 ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .24
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .27 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .57
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .57
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 ▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .60
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 ▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 2
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .72
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .105

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further informa- method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
tion). the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
push to operate the ignition switch.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob. 2
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet park-
ing.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
Emergency Key Removal feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
into the lock cylinders with either side up. information.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and push in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with 2
ignition button to place ignition in OFF position.
When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with mode. A child could operate power windows, other
access to an unlocked vehicle. controls, or move the vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is • Do not leave children or animals inside parked
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- cause serious injury or death.
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. CAUTION!

(Continued) An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always

remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY® it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
engine being shut off after two seconds.
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
or unlocked. seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a as possible by an authorized dealer.
RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the CAUTION!
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compat-
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it problems and loss of security protection.
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Replacement Keys At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs. 2
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
CAUTION! is one that has never been programmed.
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys-
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat- tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
tended. authorized dealer.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF Customer Key Programming
position. Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information the following audible and visible signals: the horn will
pulse, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules Part 15
turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
the instrument cluster will flash.
subject to the following conditions:
Rearming Of The System
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
• This device must accept any interference that may be
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
received, including interference that may cause unde-
off after 3 minutes, turn all of the visual signals off after
sired operation.
15 additional minutes, and then the Vehicle Security
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED Alarm will rearm itself.
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors To Arm The System
and liftgate for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button for unauthorized opera-
tion. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior 1. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ (refer to
switches for door locks are disabled. If something trig- ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
gers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide further information).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the To Disarm The System
vehicle: The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch the following methods:
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
2
• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for valid Key Fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passive entry
further information). door handle (if equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-
Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry hicle⬙ for further information).
(RKE) transmitter.
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
3. If any doors are open, close them. position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N- If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
Go™, insert a valid key into the ignition switch and becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
turn the key to the ON position. remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
NOTE:
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
Tamper Alert
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm. If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
Security System Manual Override
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the doors using the manual door lock plunger.
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
ILLUMINATED ENTRY NOTE:
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the • The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
doors or open any door or liftgate. ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position). 2
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the • The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur- (extreme bottom position).
ther information.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The interior lights will fade to off after approximately 30
seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF open the liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from
position. distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a
hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE
transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit- Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters. transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Flash Lights With Remote Key To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit- ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the 2
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in signal.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
formation.
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Headlight Illumination On Approach Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Instrument Panel” for further information.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Using The Panic Alarm • You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights will turn on, the park lights and turn signals Programming Additional Transmitters
will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
lights will turn on.
performed at an authorized dealer.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
Transmitter Battery Replacement
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
(24 km/h) or greater. battery.
NOTE: NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
and horn will remain on.
housing or the printed circuit board.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
other hand. the seal during removal. 2

Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Emergency Key Removal Separating RKE Transmitter Case

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over • This device must accept any interference received,
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a including interference that may cause undesired op-
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the eration.
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
with rubbing alcohol. distance, check for these two conditions:
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two 1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
halves together. life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
General Information 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
radios.
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry engine will remote start:
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
• Shift lever in PARK
2
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of • Doors closed
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• Hood closed
NOTE:
• Liftgate closed
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
• HAZARD switch off
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
reduce this range. • Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• System not disabled from previous remote start event Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
• Vehicle Security Alarm not active
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
• Ignition in OFF position vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema-
turely:
WARNING!
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon- • Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon • Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled. • Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters • Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled
could cause serious injury or death. to the ON/RUN position.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
To Enter Remote Start Mode • For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
Press and release the REMOTE START button in the Remote Start mode.
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec- • The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 2
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking 15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
cycle.
Vehicle
NOTE:
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
Remote Start mode. button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Uconnect® system. For more
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, press and release the
information on Remote Start Comfort System operation
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
refer to “Uconnect® Settings — Customer Programmable
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
press and release the START/STOP button. DOOR LOCKS
NOTE: The message “Push Start Button” will display in Manual Door Locks
the EVIC until you push the START button.
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
When remote start is activated, the driver heated seat inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
feature will automatically turn on in cold weather. This doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
feature will stay on through the duration of remote start upward.
or until the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN
position.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as 2
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Unsu-
pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause se-
vere personal injuries or death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous
for a number of reasons. A child or others could be
Manual Door Lock Knob seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is or the shift lever.
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
(Continued)
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.

Power Door Locks

A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate. Power Door Lock Switch Location
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
If you press the power door lock switch, and any front Auto Unlock On Exit
door is open, the power locks will not operate. This The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in power door locks if:
the vehicle. Removing the Key Fob or closing the door 2
will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and the 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
ignition is in the LOCK or ACC position, a chime will 2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob. returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
4. Any vehicle door is opened.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The 5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage The Child-Protection Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into the
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
child lock control and rotate it to the LOCK position.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened 2
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.

NOTE:
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys-
tem, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door. • For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the lock knob up to the UNLOCK position, roll down
NOTE: When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is the window, and open the door with the outside
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the door handle.
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock
System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into the
child lock control and rotate it to the UNLOCK
position.

Child-Protection Door Lock Function

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the desired position.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ • If the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE transmitter or
Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds,
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the
theft alarm. 2
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
NOTE: (1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
ment Panel” for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
sponse time.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the
liftgate automatically.
NOTE: All doors and the liftgate will unlock when the
front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Grabbing The Driver’s Door Handle Transmitter In Vehicle
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s front Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to “Elec- unlock feature which will function if the ignition is OFF.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Set-
tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE 2
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out-
side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
To Enter The Liftgate Liftgate Unlock/Lock Button
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the button underneath the left
side of the accent bar, which is located on the liftgate
below the glass, to lock or unlock the vehicle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.

Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

Press The Door Handle Button To Lock

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE: WINDOWS
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you Power Windows
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This control all of the door windows. 2
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect® System,
the key protection described in ⬙Preventing Inadver-
tent Locking of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter in
Vehicle⬙ remains active/functional.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel. Power Window Switches

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are single window controls on each passenger door
WARNING! (Continued)
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate when the ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unat-
the ON/RUN or ACC position. tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Auto-Down Feature
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The The driver’s power window switch has an Auto-down
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in feature. Press the window switch past the first detent,
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- release, and the window will go down automatically.
formation.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
WARNING! to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location To stop the window from going all the way down during
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of the Auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection • Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
On some models, the driver and front passenger power
window switches have an Auto-up feature. Pull the closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually. 2
window switch up to the second detent, release, and the
window will go up automatically.
WARNING!
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly. There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury, be sure to
To close the window part way, pull the window switch clear your arms, hands, fingers, and objects from the
up to the first detent and release it when you want the window path before closing the window. Such en-
window to stop. trapment may result in serious injury.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Reset Auto-Up the down position). To enable the window controls, press
and release the window lockout button again (setting it in
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
the up position).
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window control on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls, Window Lockout Switch
press and release the window lockout button (setting it in

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Wind Buffeting LIFTGATE
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of The liftgate can be unlocked or locked pressing the
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the UNLOCK or LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the (RKE) transmitter, the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive 2
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain Entry) LOCK/UNLOCK button underneath the left side
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- of the accent bar, which is located on the liftgate below
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the glass or by activating the power door lock switch
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear located on either front door trim panel.
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
For further information on Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Pas-
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
sive Entry), refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
NOTE: The liftgate cannot be unlocked or locked with
the manual door lock plungers on the door trim panels or
the door lock cylinder on the driver’s door.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To open the unlocked liftgate, squeeze the handle and NOTE: Because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
pull the liftgate toward you. Gas props will raise and ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
support the liftgate in the open position. opening the liftgate in cold weather.

WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. These fumes could
injure you and your passengers. Keep the liftgate
closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
blower switch on the climate control is set at high
speed. Do not use the recirculation mode.

Liftgate Release

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS • An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems: • Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating • Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
2
positions enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located • All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs) or a cinching
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint) latch plate, or both, which lock the seat belt webbing
into position by extending the belt all the way out and
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) a child seat or secure a large item in a seat — if
that span the front, second, and third row seating for equipped
the driver and passengers seated next to a window Please pay close attention to the information in this
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
WARNING!
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
infant and child restraint systems. For more information air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
CHildren (LATCH). years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
vehicle with a rear seat.
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
risk of harm from a deploying air bag: secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
buckled up in a rear seat. ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
(Refer to “Child Restraints”) under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ. 2
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. WARNING!

2. All occupants should always wear their lap and • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
shoulder belts properly. severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Always wear your seat belts even though you have
Front Air Bags room to inflate. air bags.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the (Continued)
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument • Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
could cause serious injury, including death. Air Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably you to be severely injured or killed.
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel. Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) also and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or far away from home or on your own street.
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck- of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
vehicle are buckled up properly. be belted at all times.
(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Lap/Shoulder Belts
WARNING! (Continued)
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
combination lap/shoulder belts. vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during belts. 2
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under using a seat belt properly.
normal conditions. However, in an collision, the belt will • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the belts are designed to go around the large bones of
vehicle or being thrown out. your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
WARNING! • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
or killed. safe, too.

(Continued) (Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is located on the pillar near the Pulling Out Lap/Shoulder Belt
back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
necessary to make the belt go around your lap.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride 2
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.

Connecting Latch Plate To Buckle (Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
WARNING! (Continued)
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal collision.
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron-
gest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.

Removing Slack From Belt

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
WARNING!
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi-
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t webbing to allow the belt to retract fully. 2
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as WARNING!
possible and keep it snug.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi-
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
ately and have it fixed.
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac- etc.).
tor will withdraw any slack in the belt.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat, the shoul-
der belt can be adjusted upward or downward to posi-
tion the belt away from your neck. Push and fully
depress the button above the webbing to release the
anchorage, then move it up or down to the position that
fits you best.

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that
it is locked in position.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
position the belt away from your neck. The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure equipped an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
cinching latch plate which are used to secure a child 2
restraint system. For additional information, refer to
shoulder belt.
“Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt”
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the under the “Child Restraints” section. The chart below
anchor point. defines the type of feature for each seating position.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, Driver Center Passenger
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
First Row N/A N/A ALR
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
Second Row ALR Cinch ALR
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
Third Row ALR N/A ALR
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate. • N/A — Not Applicable
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
folded webbing.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
ALR and is being used for normal usage: years old and under should always be properly re-
strained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort- the entire belt is extracted.
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
Equipped
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
locking mode.
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Seat Belt Pretensioners
WARNING!
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. 2
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not These devices may improve the performance of the seat
working properly when checked according to the belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
procedures in the Service Manual. early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu-
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly pants, including those in child restraints.
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
Energy Management Feature belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy worn snugly and positioned properly.
Management feature in the front seating positions to help The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
collision. sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
certain types of rear impacts.
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic. NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever-
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require ity and type of the impact.
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head 2
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.

NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and

positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
1 — Head Restraint Front Half 3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Soft Foam and Trim) (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover) If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
2 — Seatback 4 — Head Restraint Guide you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
Tubes front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat. 3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.

Hand Positioning Points On AHR

2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position. 1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism AHR In Reset Position

NOTE:
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock • If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active
into the back decorative plastic half. Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(BeltAlert®) (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and notification.
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
fastened. the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt stowed.
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your autho-
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. deactivating BeltAlert®.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu-
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
tender and store it. 2
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt WARNING!
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
the force if there is a collision. when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating posi-
Seat Belt Extender tions. Remove and store the extender when not
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and needed.
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Ad- 2 — Knee Bolster
vanced Front Air Bags
3 — Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag/Knee Bolster

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
Advanced Air Bags. and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
air bags are located above the side windows and their 2
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of covers are labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
inflation based on several factors, including the severity This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
and type of collision. Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB). The SABs are marked with
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front
seats.
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon NOTE:
seat position.
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front but they will open during air bag deployment.
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the authorized dealer immediately.
Advanced Front Air Bags.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag System Components • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag • Front and Side Impact Sensors
system components:
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Seat Track Position Sensors
• Air Bag Warning Light Advanced Front Air Bag Features
• Steering Wheel and Column The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
• Instrument Panel
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
• Knee Impact Bolsters
sensors.
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) used for more severe collisions.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
WARNING!
SAB may provide enhanced protection to help protect an
• No objects should be placed over or near the air occupant during a side impact. The Supplemental Seat-
bag on the instrument panel, because any such Mounted Side Air Bag is marked with an air bag label 2
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle roll-
over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential Supplemental Side Curtain Air Bags
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down- NOTE:
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
WARNING! (Continued)
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during between you and the side air bags; the performance
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or could be adversely affected and/or objects could be 2
killed. pushed into you, causing serious injury.
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali- • Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
brated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during not have any accessory items installed which will
impacts that require air bag occupant protection. alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
WARNING! nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right vehicle for any reason.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
high enough to block the location of the SABIC. restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
The area where the SABIC is located should remain up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
free from any obstructions. seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially chil-
dren, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint. Air Bags and the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
work with the knee impact bolsters to provide improved
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
protection for the driver and front passenger.
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
child.
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
required for this vehicle.
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
Knee Impact Bolsters ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, Supple-
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu- mental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and front seat belt
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front pretensioners, as required, depending on several factors,
Air Bags. including the severity and type of impact.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain type of collision.
frontal collisions depending on several factors, including 2
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
the severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
Bags and the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
have deployed.
rollover collisions.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
away from an inflating air bag.
including some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the
hand, depending on the type and location of impact, ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF position,
Advanced Front Air Bags and the Supplemental Driver or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and
Side Knee Air Bag may deploy in crashes with little the air bags will not inflate.
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
WARNING!
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
air bag system immediately.
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light Inflator Units
comes on again after initial startup.
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad- Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator Unit
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates 2
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
are possible, based on several factors, including the air bag, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover separates and
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
full size. The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to milliseconds.
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle. designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
triggered, releasing a large quantity of non-toxic gas. The the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
inflates in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
at a very high speed and with such a high force that it are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
This especially applies to children. curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
it is inflated.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Front And Side Impact Sensors • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
removed.
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events. • Unlock the doors automatically. 2
Enhanced Accident Response System In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
the communication network remains intact, and the changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the If A Deployment Occurs
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
immediately after deployment.
ing functions:
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or the air bag system.
until the ignition is cycled to off.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
or all of the following may occur: throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
structions for cleaning.
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. bags will not be in place to protect you.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a WARNING!
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately. Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im-
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system not function properly if modifications are made. 2
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
be injured if the air bag system is not there to air bag system service. If your seat, including your
protect you. Do not modify the components or trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
add aftermarket side steps or running boards. modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
fuse is good.
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service Event Data Recorder (EDR)
the air bag system immediately.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
first turned to the ON/RUN position. bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
eight second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
is designed to record such data as: personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation. 2
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
were buckled/fastened; In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Child Restraints
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a United States, and every Canadian province, requires
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly • http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash childsafety-index-53.htm
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front. WARNING!
There are different sizes and types of restraints for • “Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward-facing
children from newborn size to the child almost large child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child front of it!” Refer to visor and door shut face
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct mounted labels for information.
seat for your child. • In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has baby, can become a projectile inside the vehicle.
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety The force required to hold even an infant on your
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install lap could become so great that you could not hold
it in the vehicle where you will use it. the child, no matter how strong you are. The child
and others could be badly injured. Any child
NOTE: riding in your vehicle should be in a proper re-
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or straint for the child’s size.
call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer
to Transport Canada’s website for additional information:

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint

Infants and Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible 2
Toddlers younger and who have not reached the Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
height or weight limits of their child seat of the vehicle
restraint
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
who have out-grown the height or weight five-point Harness, facing forward in the
limit of their rear-facing child restraint rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
forward-facing child restraint, but are too vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt the vehicle
Children Too Large Children 12 years old or younger, who Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
for Child Restraints have out-grown the height or weight limit the vehicle
of their booster seat

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants And Child Restraints rearward-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
Children should remain rearward-facing until they reach
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
child seat.
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
WARNING!
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-facing years or younger, including a child in a rearward
or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats facing infant seat.
often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing • Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used vehicle with a rear seat.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Older Children And Child Restraints seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and WARNING! 2
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc- • Improper installation can lead to failure of an
tion are for children who are over two years old or who infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of collision. The child could be badly injured or
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for directions exactly when installing an infant or
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height child restraint.
allowed by the child seat. • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
All children whose weight or height is above the the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against serious personal injury.
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Integrated Child Booster Seat — If Equipped
The Integrated Child Booster Seat is located in each
outboard second-row passenger seat. The Booster Seat is
designed for children weighing between 48 and 85 lbs (22
and 39 kg) and between 47 in (119 cm) and 57 in (145 cm)
tall.
To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seat
follow these steps:
1. Slide the second row seat to the full rear position to
use the Integrated Child Booster Seat.
NOTE: The second row bench with Integrated Child Release Loop
Booster Seat must remain in the full rear position during use. 3. Lift the seat cushion up and push back to lock it in the
booster seat position.
2. Pull the release loop forward to release the latch and
seat cushion.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
NOTE: The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on
the hips and as snug as possible.
7. Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” 2

Booster Seat
4. Place the child upright in the seat with their back
firmly against the seatback.
5. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Proper Belt Use
6. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary
to allow the seat belt to go around the child’s lap. 8. To remove the slack from the lap belt, pull upward on
the shoulder portion of the seat belt.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
buckle. of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
WARNING! 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
Securely lock the seat cushion into position before between their neck and arm?
using the seat. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious
injury. 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

Children Too Large For Booster Seats If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit peri-
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
alone: Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
or behind their back.
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below

Combined
Weight of the LATCH –
LATCH – 2
Restraint Type Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top
Child + Child Lower Anchors Seat Belt Only
Restraint + Top Tether Tether Anchor
Only
Anchor
Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
Restraint System age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle

Lower Anchor / Top Tether Locations

• Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seat-
ing position
• Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraint LATCH Positions

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
weight of the child restraint) for using the the combined weight of the child and the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
child restraint? seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
belt be used together to attach a rear- LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint? facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can two child restraints be attached using No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
a common lower LATCH anchorage? two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front
the back of the front passenger seat? passenger seat if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact. See your child re-
straint owner’s manual for more information. 2
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The head restraints in the second row are
removable.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that are

found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Latch Anchorages

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
In addition, there are tether strap anchors lo- Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
cated behind each rear seatback, near to the anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
floor.
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in the rear
seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard
position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages D
and E are used for the left outboard position behind the
driver (3). Anchorages B and C are used for the center
seating position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible
child restraint using anchorages C and D. This is not a
Tether Strap Anchors
LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
You can install up to two child seats using the LATCH Options for installing two child seats using the LATCH
system at the same time. If you are installing three child anchorages in this vehicle:
restraints, you must use the seatbelt to install the center
1. Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3):
child restraint. You can use either the LATCH anchors for 2
Install the child seats in the right and left outboard
positions (1) and (3) or the vehicle’s seat belt for installing
seating positions using lower anchorages A and B, and
the child seats in the outboard positions.
D and E. Do not use the center seat anchorage, C. If the
child seats do not block the center seat belt webbing and
buckle, the center seat belt can be used to restraint an
occupant or child restraint in the center seating position.
2. Left outboard and center seating positions (3 and 2):
Install the first child seat in the left outboard seating
position using lower anchorages D and E. Install the
second child seat using the center anchorages, B and C.
Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the opposite
door, A. Do not use the remaining right outboard
seating position (1) for any occupant. The center child
restraint will block the seat belt buckle for this position.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• Use anchorages B and C to install a LATCH- • If you are installing three child restraints next to
compatible child restraint in the center seating each other, you must use the seat belt and the center
position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible tether anchor for the center position. You can then
child restraint using anchorages C and D. This is use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat
not a LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle. belt for installing the child seats in the outboard
• A child restraint installed in the center position (2) positions. Please refer to “Installing the LATCH-
will block the seat belt buckle for the empty right Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical
outboard seating position (1). Do not use this seat installation instructions.
for another occupant. Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
than one child restraint. restraint systems will be installed as described here.
(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint 4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
ing position.
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt
following the instructions below. See the section “Install- 5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the 2
ing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
what type of seat belt each seating position has. Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
anchorages. in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that
seating position. For some second row seats, you may 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its in any direction.
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the car seat.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
WARNING!
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be them.
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle. WARNING!
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt • Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
or child restraint. The child could be badly injured
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Belt Restraints in this Vehicle
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking Re- 2
tractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of
seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into
a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the
retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise
while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. For
additional information on ALR, refer to the “Automatic
Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.”
The cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion
of the seatbelt tight when webbing is pulled tight and
straight through a child restraint’s belt path. Please see the
following table(s) and the following sections for more infor-
mation about both types of seat belts.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + Weight limit of the Always use the tether anchor when using
weight of the child restraint) for using the Child Restraint the seat belt to install a forward facing
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a child restraint, up to the recommended
forward facing child restraint? weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch Yes Contact between the front passenger seat
the back of the front passenger seat? and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The head restraints in the second row are
removable.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten Yes In positions with cinching latch plates
the seat belt against the belt path of the (CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted
child restraint? up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle
stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
position. For some second row seats, you may need to hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
2
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the car seat. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor the child restraint rearward and downward into the
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
“click.” the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
against the child seat. Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
in any direction. path.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. “click.”
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching 4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to vehicle seat.
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. strap. Refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The
You may also move the front seat forward to allow Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether
more room for the car seat. anchor.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm) in the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
any direction. into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child 2
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, discon- install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short You may need to move the seat forward to provide
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child is available.
restraint.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass
the tether strap around the outboard side of the head
restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.

Seat Track Release Lever

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the two
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child Transporting Pets
restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
WARNING! injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in 2
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to a collision.
increased head motion and possible injury to the Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
child. Use only the anchorage position directly or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap. ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap. Drive moderately during the first 300 mi (500 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the SAFETY TIPS
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Transporting Passengers
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided. NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy-conserving type lubricant. Oil
WARNING!
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For • Do not leave children or animals inside parked
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve- cause serious injury or death.
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED. inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be injured or killed.
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter- • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
preted as an indication of difficulty. vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and WARNING!
using a seat belt properly.
• On seven passenger models, do not drive the Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon 2
vehicle with the second row passenger seat in the monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
easy entry/exit position (seat cushion flipped up- Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
ward and seat moved forward), as this position is eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
only intended for entering and exiting the third follow these safety tips:
row seats. Failure to follow this warning may result • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
in personal injury. confined areas any longer than needed to move
• On seven passenger models, do not allow a passen- your vehicle in or out of the area.
ger to sit in a third row seat with the second row • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the passenger rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
could slide underneath the seat belt and be seri- closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
ously or even fatally injured. set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
WARNING! (Continued)
Vehicle
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling Seat Belts
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
blower at high speed. cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
system.
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system. Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
Air Bag Warning Light Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
The light should turn on and remain on for vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
four to six seconds as a bulb check when the unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they 2
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
not lit during starting, or if the light stays on, or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
flickers, or turns on while driving, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer. WARNING!
Defroster Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel sonal injury.
the air directed against the windshield. See your autho- • Always make sure that floor mats are properly
rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable. attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor cover-
ings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering with the
pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
WARNING! (Continued)
The Vehicle
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor Tires
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
pedal area and interfere with the pedals. patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
been removed for cleaning. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects
can become trapped under the brake pedal and accel- Lights
erator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in- exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
stalled, if not equipped from the factory. signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or panel.
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
2
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 ▫ Uconnect® 4.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 3
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .119 ▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 ▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped. . . . . . .122 ▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Manual Folding Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . .122
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .122
䡵 Uconnect® PHONE (8.4/8.4N). . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .123
▫ Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
䡵 Uconnect® PHONE (4.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 ▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 ▫ Recliner Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .172 ▫ Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 ▫ Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
䡵 VOICE COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ Third Row Passenger Seats — Seven Passenger
▫ Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
▫ Uconnect® Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ 60/40 Split Second-Row Passenger Seats . . . . .214
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
▫ 50/50 Split Third-Row Passenger Seats With
▫ Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . .200 Fold-Flat Feature — Seven Passenger Models . .221
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .202

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .223 ▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .226 ▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
3
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available with 䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .232
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .236
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .238
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF ▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 ▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 ▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .250
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Touchscreen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Interior Observation Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped . . . . . . .257
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .257
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .248

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .259 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 ▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .262 ▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .263 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
3
▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 ▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .275
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .267 ▫ Power Inverter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .269 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 ▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .269 ▫ Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Flip ’n Stow™ Front Passenger Seat ▫ Rechargeable Flashlight — If Equipped . . . . . .285
Storage — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
▫ Cargo Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Second-Row Passenger Seat Temporary
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Second-Row Map Pocket And Grocery
Retainers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ In-Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner . . .283 䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .294

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with 3
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield). This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.

WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
Automatic Dimming Mirror convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
CAUTION! passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Power Mirrors Models Without Express Window Feature
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door Press the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right)
trim panel. and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the
mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
Models With Express Window Feature
3
Press and release the mirror select button marked L (left)
or R (right) and then press one of the four arrow buttons
to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
The selection times out after 30 seconds of inactivity in
order to guard against accidentally changing a mirror
position following an adjustment.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Power Mirror Switches

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped • The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located • The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
by pressing the button. (This may require multiple button
pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
to the normal driving position.
Manual Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled. Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions:
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they
forward, rearward and normal.
will automatically unfold.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
Resetting the Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
following occurs:
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding. rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
Your Vehicle” for further information.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use This feature allows for additional flexibility in position-
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the ing the visor to block out the sun.
mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automati-
1. Fold down the sun visor.
cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip. 3
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.

Uconnect® PHONE (4.3)

Uconnect® 4.3
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone al-
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect® Phone supports the following features: Screen Activated Features:
Voice Activated Features: • Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen,
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mo- • Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis-
bile” or, “Dial 248–555–1212”), played on the touchscreen,
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”), • Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen,
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”), • Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs,
• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,” • Listen to Music on your Bluetooth® Device via the
“Show Outgoing calls,” “Show missed Calls,” “Show touchscreen,
Recent Calls”),
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John to connect to them quickly.
Smith Mobile”).
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically
mute your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
For Uconnect® Customer Support:
WARNING!
• U.S. residents – visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call
1–877–855–8400. Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
• Canadian Residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at-
or call, 1–800–465–2001 (English) or 1–800–387–9983 tention should be focused on safely operating the 3
(French). vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
If your mobile phone only supports the Headset Profile causing serious injury or death.
you may not be able to use any Uconnect® Phone The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®
features. Refer to your mobile service provider or the “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect® features
phone manufacturer for details. Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between different electronic devices to connect to each other without
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit wires or a docking station, so Uconnect® Phone works no
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse,
microphone for private conversation. pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and
has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Uconnect® Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
audio devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used with can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
the system at a time. The system is available in English, knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
Spanish, or French languages. switch), if so equipped.
Uconnect® Phone Button Operation
The Uconnect® Phone Button is used to Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
enter the phone mode and make calls, show Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phone- menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
book etc., When you press the button you will Uconnect® Phone prompts. There are two general meth-
hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command. ods for how Voice Command works:
Uconnect® Voice Command Button 1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mo-
bile.”
The Uconnect® Voice Command Button is
only used for “barge in” and when you are 2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
already in a call and you want to send Tones or guide you to complete the task.
make another call.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
You will be prompted for a specific command and then works best when you talk in a normal conversational
guided through the available options. tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another Natural Speech
prompt. Your Uconnect® Phone Voice system uses a Natural 3
• For certain operations, compound commands can be Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
“John Smith” and then “mobile,” the following com-
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mobile.”
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
compound command form of the voice command is would like to.”
given. You can also break the commands into parts and The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or
say each part of the command when you are asked for sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly Smith.”
it. For example, you can use the compound command For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you system identifies the topic or context and provides the
can break the compound command form into two associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to
voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked call?” in the case where a phone call was requested but the
“John Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect® Phone specific name was not recognized.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system Cancel Command
requires more information from the user it will ask a At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
question to which the user can respond without pressing you will be returned to the main menu.
the Voice Command button on your steering wheel.
You can also press the or button on your steering
Voice Command Tree wheel when the system is listening for a command and
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section. be returned to the main or previous menu.
Help Command Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
the beep.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle, simply press your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect® web-
the button on your steering wheel and say a com- site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
mand or say “help.” All Uconnect® Phone sessions begin
with a press of the button on the radio control head.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
NOTE: 2. At the “Paired Phones” screen press the “Add Device”
soft-key and a pop-up with instructions will appear.
• You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure. 3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® en-
abled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone,
• The vehicle must be in PARK.
select the “Uconnect®” device and enter the PIN.
1. You can do either of the following: 3
4. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
a. Press the “Settings” hard-key, page down to the the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
“Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key, press it and you will this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
see the “Paired Phones” screen. If there are no this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
paired phones you will see <Empty> as the first precedence over other paired phones within range.
device name.
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
b. Press the MORE hard-key, then press the Phone
1. Touch the “Player” hard-key to begin.
soft-key and you will go to the Uconnect® Phone
main screen. Press the “Settings” soft-key. If there 2. Press the “Source” soft-key.
are no phones currently paired a pop-up will
3. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.
appear. If you select “Yes” you will go the “Paired
Phones” screen, if you select “No” you will return 4. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.
to the Uconnect® Phone main menu.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® en- Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
abled Audio Device. When prompted on the device, Audio Device
select the “Uconnect®” device and enter the PIN. Uconnect® Phone will automatically connect to the high-
6. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen est priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within
while the system is connecting. range. If you would need to choose a particular Phone or
Audio Device follow these steps:
7. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not 1. Touch the “Settings” hard-key,
this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make 2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key,
this device the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within range. 3. Touch to select the particular Phone or the “Phone/
Audio” soft-key and then an Audio Device,
NOTE: If No is selected, device priority is determined by
the order in which it was paired. The latest device paired 4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Connect
will have the higher priority. Device” soft-key,
You can also use the following VR command to bring up 5. Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
a list of paired audio devices.
• “Show Paired Audio Devices.”

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device 4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Delete De-
vice” soft-key.
1. Touch the “Settings” hard-key.
5. Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
3. Select the Phone or Audio Device.
1. Touch the “Settings” hard-key. 3
4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Disconnect
Device” soft-key. 2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.
5. Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen. 3. Select a different Phone or Audio Device then the
currently connected device.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Make Favor-
1. Touch the “Settings” hard-key.
ite” soft-key; you will see the chosen device move to
2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key. the top of the list.
3. Select the Phone or Audio Device. 5. Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
Transfer From Mobile Phone) – If Equipped loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect® Phone.
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text • Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
Book Access Profile may support this feature. See able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
Uconnect® website, www.UconnectPhone.com, for sup- able for use.
ported phones.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book, phone is accessible.
follow the procedure in the Voice Recognition Quick
Reference section. • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
phone connection is made to the Uconnect® Phone, for phone connection.
example, after you start the vehicle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Emergency And Towing Assistance plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your
The 911/Help numbers can only be altered. These can not
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
be deleted or the names can not be changed.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
To change the 911/Help number follow these steps.
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call 3
1. Touch the “phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main
with Uconnect® Phone.
screen.
• Redial,
2. Touch the “911/Help” soft-key. Touch the appropriate
listing to alter, Emergency for example. • Dial by touching in the number,
3. Once Emergency is touched, the Edit soft-key appears. • Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Number, Call by
Touch the “Edit” soft-key and you will be given the Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back),
choice to Edit Number or Reset to Default.
• Mobile Phonebook,
4. Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the task.
• Recent Call Log.
Phone Call Features
NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can be
The following features can be accessed through the done with one call or less active.
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dial By Saying A Number Call Controls
1. Press the button to begin. The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
features:
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial 248-555-1212.” • Answer
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial 248-555-1212. • End
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name • Ignore
1. Press the button on your steering wheel to begin, • Hold/unhold
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, • Mute/unmute
say “Call John Doe Mobile,”
• Transfer the call to/from the phone
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number associated
• Swap two active calls
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe. • Join two active calls together

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Touch-Tone Number Entry • Missed Calls
1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key. • All Calls
2. Touch the “Dial” soft-key. These can be accessed by touching the recent calls
soft-key on the Phone main screen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
You can also press the button and say “Show my 3
4. Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and
incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls
touch “Call.”
will be displayed.
To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press
the button while in a call and say “1234#” or you NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”,
can say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail pass- “Recent” or “Missed.”
word is stored in your mobile phonebook. Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Recent Calls Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
following call types:
tem, if on, and will display a pop-up showing Answer or
• Incoming Calls Ignore. Press the Answer soft-key or the button on the
steering wheel to accept the call.
• Outgoing Calls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Currently In Progress Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for call
press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
phone. Uconnect® Phone will then interrupt the vehicle call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
audio system, if on, and will display a pop-up showing in progress. Or you can place a call on hold by touching
Answer, Ignore or Transfer. Press the button to place the “Hold” soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dial
the current call on hold and answer the incoming call. a number from the dialpad, recent calls or from the
phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
to “Join Calls” in this section.
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Toggling Between Calls Redial
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), 1. Press the “Redial” soft-key,
press the button until you hear a single beep, indicat-
ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have 2. or press the button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
Also you can press the Swap soft-key on the Phone main 3. The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that 3
screen. was dialed from your mobile phone.
Join Calls Call Continuation
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone main Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call. switched to OFF.
Call Termination • After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the End soft-key continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call
or the button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and
call. If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect® Phone Features NOTE:
Emergency Assistance • The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
reachable:
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency area.
number for your area.
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
operational, you may reach the emergency number as for the mobile phone directly.
follows:
• Press the button to begin, WARNING!

• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
say “Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will in- Uconnect® Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in
struct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency emergency situations, when the mobile phone has net-
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, work coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect®
and Mexico. Phone.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Roadside Assistance / Towing Assistance Working With Automated Systems
If you need roadside/towing assistance: This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
• Press the button to begin,
navigating through an automated telephone system.
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail 3
say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assis-
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
tance.”
or automated customer service line. Some services re-
NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
(1-800-528-2069 for the U.S., 1-800-363-4869 for Canada,
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
55-14-3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for out-
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
side Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
Group LLC 24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage
touchscreen or press the button and say the word
details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the
“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For example,
24-Hour Roadside Assistance Card.
if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7
Voice Mail Calling 4 6 #), you can press the button and say, “Send 3 7 4
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working 6 #.” Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence of
with Automated Systems.”

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
numbers, is also to be used for navigating through an • Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
automated customer service center menu structure, and out settings that are too short and may not allow the
to leave a number on a pager. use of this feature.
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as • Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager some phones are not supported over Bluetooth®.
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone- These additional symbols will be ignored when dialing
book entry and/or Last Name as “Voice Password,” then a numbered sequence.
if you press the button and say “Send Voicemail
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
Password,” the Uconnect® Phone will then send the
corresponding phone number associated with the phone- The button can be used when you wish to skip part
book entry, as tones over the phone. of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately.
For example, if a prompt is asking “There are two
NOTE: numbers with the name John. Say the full name” you
• The first number encountered for that contact will be could press the button and say, “John Smith” to
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be select that option without having to listen to the rest of
ignored. the voice prompt.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Voice Response Length Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
Detailed Voice Response Length. WARNING!

1. Touch the “More” hard-key, then touch the “Settings” Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
soft-key. control, accident and injury. Chrysler Group LLC
strongly recommends that you use extreme caution 3
2. Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to when using any device or feature that may take your
Voice Response Length. focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to against the use of any handheld device while driv-
show your selection. ing, encourage the use of voice-operated systems
when possible and that you become aware of appli-
Phone And Network Status Indicators cable laws that may affect the use of electronic
Uconnect® Phone will provide notification to inform you devices while driving.
of your phone and network status when you are attempt-
ing to make a phone call using Uconnect® Phone. The
status is given for network signal strength and phone
battery strength.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise able to hear the conversation coming from the other
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
dialing a number with your connected Bluetooth® mo- order to mute the Uconnect® Phone simply touch the
bile phone, the audio will be played through your “Mute” button on the Phone main screen.
vehicle’s audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work
the same as if you dial the number using voice a Advanced Phone Connectivity
command. Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa- without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect®
that the call did not go through even though the call is in Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer button on the
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the Phone main screen.
audio.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the • Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone during a Voice Command period.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth® • Performance is maximized under:
connection between a Uconnect® Phone paired mobile • low-to-medium blower setting,
phone and the Uconnect® Phone, follow the instructions • low-to-medium vehicle speed,
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual. 3
• low road noise,
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect® • smooth road surface,
Phone • fully closed windows,
Voice Command • dry weather condition.
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to • Even though the system is designed for users speaking
provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
console (if equipped) and the mirror. cents, the system may not always work for some.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When navigating through an automated system such • Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
• Even though international dialing for most number
not in motion is recommended.
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names number combinations may not be supported.
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Lo- compromised with the convertible top down.
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Far End Audio Performance • Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting.
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed.
Bluetooth® Communication Link 3
• Low Road Noise. Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
• Smooth Road Surface. Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
• Fully Closed Windows. off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
• Dry Weather Conditions, And Bluetooth® ON mode.
• Operation From The Driver’s Seat. Power-Up
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
not the Uconnect® Phone. must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
NOTE: • You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
• You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send • You can replace “4” with any message number shown
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you on the screen.
which phone number you want to send a message to
• If your phone does not support phonebook download 3
for John Smith.
or call log download over Bluetooth® than these
• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or commands will return a response that the contact does
“Other.” not exist in the phonebook.
• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing • Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
Calls” or “Missed Calls.” underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
• Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect®
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth®.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information Uconnect® PHONE (8.4/8.4N)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4N
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
following conditions:
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone al-
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
the party responsible for compliance could void the phone.
user’s authority to operate the equipment. Uconnect® Phone supports the following features:
• This device may not cause harmful interference. Voice Activated Features:
• This device must accept any interference received, • Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mo-
including interference that may cause undesired op- bile” or, “Dial 248 555 1212”).
eration.
• Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming
SMS messages.
• Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John
Smith Mobile”).
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call • Sending a text message via the touchscreen.
Back”).
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth® Device via the
• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls”, touchscreen.
“Show Outgoing calls”, “Show missed Calls”, “Show
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
Recent Calls”).
to connect to them quickly. 3
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
Smith Mobile”).
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly.
Screen Activated Features Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
• Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen. vehicles audio system; the system will automatically
mute your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone. For
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis- Uconnect® customer support, visit the following web-
played on the touchscreen. site:
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are • U.S. residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen. 1–877–855–8400.
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs. • Canadian residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com
or call 1–800–465–2001 (English) or 1–800–387–9983
• Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.
(French).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between wires or a docking station, so Uconnect® Phone works no
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse,
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and
microphone for private conversation. has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The
Uconnect® Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio
WARNING! devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or
paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used with
Any voice commanded system should be used only the system at a time. The system is available in English,
in safe driving conditions following all applicable Spanish, or French languages.
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at-
tention should be focused on safely operating the Uconnect® Phone Button
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in an accident The Uconnect® Phone Button is used to
causing serious injury or death. enter the phone mode and make calls, show
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phone-
The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®
book etc., When you press the button you will
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect® features
hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.
Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other without

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Uconnect® Voice Command Button Operation
The Uconnect® Voice Command Button is
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
only used for “barge in” and when you are Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
already in a call and you want to send Tones or
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
make another call. Uconnect® Phone prompts. There are two general meth-
The button is also used to access the Voice Com- ods for how Voice Command works:
3
mands for the Uconnect® Voice Command features if 1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mo-
your vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect® Voice bile.”
Command section for direction on how to use the
button. 2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the ve-
hicles audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone You will be prompted for a specific command and then
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control guided through the available options.
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
switch), if so equipped. beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
prompt.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For certain operations, compound commands can be Natural Speech
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then Your Uconnect® Phone Voice system uses a Natural
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following com- Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mo-
bile.” Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
compound command form of the voice command is and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
given. You can also break the commands into parts and would like to.”
say each part of the command when you are asked for
it. For example, you can use the compound command The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
can break the compound command form into two Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen-
voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked tence, the system identifies the topic or context and
“John Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect® Phone provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
works best when you talk in a normal conversational do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/ requested but the specific name was not recognized.
meters away from you.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system Cancel Command
requires more information from the user it will ask a At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
question to which the user can respond without pressing you will be returned to the main menu.
the Voice Command button on your steering wheel.
You can also press the or button on your steering
Voice Command Tree wheel when the system is listening for a command and 3
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section. be returned to the main or previous menu.
Help Command Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
the beep.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle, simply press your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect® web-
the button on your steering wheel and say a com- site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
mand or say “help.” All Uconnect® Phone sessions begin
NOTE:
with a press of the button on the radio control head.
• You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure.
• The vehicle must be in PARK.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Press the “Phone” soft-key on the screen to begin.3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. Then, search
for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled
2. If there is no phone currently connected with the
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter
system, a pop-up will appear.
the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen.
• If “No” is selected, touch the “Settings” soft-key
from the Uconnect® Phone main screen,
• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®
enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the
phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the
Uconnect® screen,
• See step 4 to complete the process.
4. Uconnect® Phone will display an in progress screen
while the system is connecting.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Pair Additional Mobile Phones
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key from the Phone main
screen,
2. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® en- 3
abled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone,
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect®
screen,
4. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting,
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make
this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.
precedence over other paired phones within range.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the
phone priority is determined by the order in which it was system, a pop-up will appear.
paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® en-
priority.
abled audio device. When prompted on the device,
You can also use the following VR commands to bring up enter the PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen,
the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
6. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen
• “Show Paired Phones” or while the system is connecting,
• “Connect My Phone” 7. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make
1. Touch the “Player” soft-key to begin, this device the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within range.
2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®,
3. Touch the “Bluetooth®” soft-key to display the Paired NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in which it was
Audio Devices screen,
paired. The latest device paired will have the higher
4. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key, priority.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
You can also use the following VR command to bring up Disconnecting A Phone or Audio Device
a list of paired audio devices:
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
• “Show Paired Phones”
2. Touch the paired phone or audio device soft-key,
• “Connect My Phone”
3. Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or name, 3
Audio Device After Pairing
4. The options pop-up will be displayed,
Uconnect® Phone will automatically connect to the high-
est priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within 5. Touch the “Disconnect Device” soft-key,
range. If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio 6. Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
Device follow these steps:
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
2. Touch the paired phone or audio device soft-key,
2. Touch the pair phone or audio device soft-key,
3. Touch to select the particular Phone or the “Paired
3. Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
Audio Sources” soft-key and then an Audio Device,
name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the
4. Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen. currently connected device,

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. The options pop-up will be displayed, Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) – If Equipped
5. Touch the “Delete Device” soft-key,
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
6. Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen. Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
Book Access Profile may support this feature. See
2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key, Uconnect® website, www.UconnectPhone.com, for sup-
ported phones.
3. Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
name, • To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
follow the procedure in the Voice Recognition Quick
4. The options pop-up will be displayed,
Reference section.
5. Touch the “Make Favorite” soft-key; you will see the
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
chosen device move to the top of the list,
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
6. Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen. phone connection is made to the Uconnect® Phone, for
example, after you start the vehicle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down- Managing Your Favorite Phonebook
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected There are three ways you can add an entry to your
to the Uconnect® Phone. Favorite Phonebook.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- 1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite,
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail- 3
phone main screen.
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
able for use. 2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select phone-
book from the Phone main screen, then select the
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile appropriate number. Touch the + next to the selected
phone is accessible. number to display the options pop-up. In the pop-up
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or select “Add to Favorites.”
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
phone connection.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the + on that selected entry. When the Options pop-up
appears, touch “Add from Mobile.” You will then be
asked which contact and number to choose from your
mobile phonebook. When complete the new favorite
will be shown.

NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to

remove an existing favorite.
3. From the Phone main screen, select phonebook. From
the phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” soft-key
and then select the + soft-key located to the right of the
phonebook record. Select an empty entry and touch

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
To Remove A Favorite
1. To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the
Phone main screen.
2. Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and
then touch the + Options soft-key. 3
3. Touch the + next to the Favorite you would like to
remove.

4. The Options pop-up will display, touch “Remove from

Favs.”

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency And Towing Assistance
The Emergency and Towing Assistance Favorite numbers
can only be altered. These cannot be deleted and the
names cannot be changed.
To change the Emergency or Towing Assistance numbers
follow these steps.
1. Touch the “Phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main
screen.
2. Touch the “Favorites” soft-key. Scroll to the bottom of
the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Assistance
Favorites. 5. The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose
between Editing the number or resetting the number
3. Touch the + Options soft-key.
to default.
4. Touch the + next to appropriate Favorite that is to be
altered.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Phone Call Features • Mobile Phonebook
The following features can be accessed through the • Recent Call Log
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available and
• SMS Message Viewer
supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan.
For example, if your mobile service plan provides three- Dial By Saying A Number
way calling, this feature can be accessed through the 3
1. Press the button to begin,
Uconnect® Phone. Check with your mobile service pro-
vider for the features that you have. 2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call say “Dial 151 1234 5555,”

Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call 3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number
with Uconnect® Phone. 151–1234–5555.

• Redial Call By Saying A Phonebook Name

• Dial by touching in the number 1. Press the button on your steering wheel to begin,

• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by 2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back) say “Call John Doe Mobile,”

• Favorites

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number associated Touch-Tone Number Entry
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key,
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
2. Touch the “Dial” soft-key,
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call 3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed,
features: 4. Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and
• Answer touch “Call.”
To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press
• End
the button on your steering wheel while in a call
• Ignore and say “Send 1234#” or you can say “Send Voicemail
Password” if Voicemail password is stored in your mo-
• Hold/unhold
bile phonebook.
• Mute/unmute
• Transfer the call to/from the phone
• Swap two active calls
• Join two active calls together

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Recent Calls • Missed Calls
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the • All Calls
following call types:
These can be accessed by touching the “recent calls”
soft-key on the Phone main screen.
You can also press the button and say “Show my 3
incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls
will be displayed.
You can also press the button and say “Show my
recent calls” from any screen and the All calls screen will
be displayed.
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,”
“Recent” or “Missed.”

• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Currently In Progress Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the You can place a call on hold by touching the Hold
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys- soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dial a number
tem. Press the button to accept the call. You can also from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the
touch the “answer” soft-key or touch the caller ID box. phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
to “Join Calls” in this section.
Currently In Progress
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for During an active call, touch the “Hold” soft-key on the
call waiting that you normally hear when using your Phone main screen.
mobile phone. Press the phone button, answer soft-
Toggling Between Calls
key or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and
answer the incoming call. If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
touch the “Swap” soft-key on the Phone main screen.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can You can also press the button to toggle between the
only answer an incoming call or ignore it. active and held phone call.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Join Calls Call Continuation
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone main Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call. switched to OFF.
Call Termination NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio 3
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the but- system until the phone becomes out of range for the
ton or the end soft-key. Only the active call(s) will be Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to press the
terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become “transfer” soft-key when leaving the vehicle.
the new active call. Uconnect® Phone Features
Redial Emergency Assistance
Press the “Redial” soft-key, or press the and after the If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
“Listening” prompt and the following beep, say “Re- reachable:
dial.”
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that was number for your area.
dialed from your mobile phone.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is • The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
operational, you may reach the emergency number as chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
follows: for the mobile phone directly.
1. Press the button to begin.
WARNING!
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency Uconnect® Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, emergency situations, when the mobile phone has net-
and Mexico. work coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect®
Phone.
NOTE:
Roadside Assistance / Towing Assistance
• The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the
touchscreen. If you need roadside/towing assistance:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country 1. Press the button to begin.
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and 2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assistance.”
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased system or an automated service, such as a paging service
(1-800-528-2069 for the U.S., 1-800-363-4869 for Canada, or automated customer service line. Some services re-
55-14-3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for out- quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
side Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
Group LLC 24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage 3
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
24-Hour Roadside Assistance Card.
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
Voice Mail Calling touchscreen or press the button and say the word
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working “Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For example,
with Automated Systems.” if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7
4 6 #), you can press the button and say, “Send 3 7 4
Working With Automated Systems 6 #.” Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence of
This method is used in instances where one generally has numbers, is also to be used for navigating through an
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while automated customer service center menu structure, and
navigating through an automated telephone system. to leave a number on a pager.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as • Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager out settings that are too short and may not allow the
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone- use of this feature.
book entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
Password”, then if you press the button and say
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth®.
“Send Voicemail Password” the Uconnect® Phone will
These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing
then send the corresponding phone number associated
a numbered sequence.
with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
NOTE:
The button can be used when you wish to skip part
• The first number encountered for that contact will be of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately.
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be For example, if a prompt is asking “There are two
ignored. numbers with the name John. Say the full name” you
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone could press the button and say, “John Smith” to
network configurations. This is normal. select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Voice Response Length Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
Detailed Voice Response Length. WARNING!

1. Touch the “More” soft-key (where available), then Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
touch the “Settings” soft-key, control, accident and injury. Chrysler Group LLC
strongly recommends that you use extreme caution 3
2. Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to when using any device or feature that may take your
Voice Response Length, focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to against the use of any handheld device while driv-
show your selection. ing, encourage the use of voice-operated systems
when possible and that you become aware of appli-
Phone And Network Status Indicators cable laws that may affect the use of electronic
Uconnect® Phone will provide notification to inform you devices while driving.
of your phone and network status when you are attempt-
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
ing to make a phone call using Uconnect® Phone. The
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
status is given for network signal strength and phone
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
battery strength.
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
dialing a number with your connected Bluetooth® mo- Advanced Phone Connectivity
bile phone, the audio will be played through your
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
vehicle’s audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work
the same as if you dial the number using voice a The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
command. ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect®
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer button on the
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa- Phone main screen.
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
audio. If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF) connection between a Uconnect® Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect® Phone, follow the instructions
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
mute the Uconnect® Phone simply touch the Mute
button on the Phone main screen.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect® • Low Road Noise.
Phone
• Smooth Road Surface.
Voice Command
• Fully Closed Windows.
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
• Dry Weather Condition.
provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead 3
console (if equipped) and the mirror. Even though the system is designed for many languages
and accents, the system may not always work for some.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
When navigating through an automated system such as
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would voice mail, or when sending a page, before speaking the
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
you.
NOTE: It is recommended that you do not store names in
• Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
a voice command period.
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate
Performance is maximized under: is optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting. “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).

• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Even though international dialing for most number com- Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to
binations is supported, some shortcut dialing number a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not
combinations may not be supported. the Uconnect® Phone.
Far End Audio Performance Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
Audio quality is maximized under: lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.

• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting. In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be

compromised with the convertible top down.
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed.
Voice Text Reply
• Low Road Noise.
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
• Smooth Road Surface. your phone.
• Fully Closed Windows. Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth® in order
to use this feature. If the Uconnect® Phone determines
• Dry Weather Conditions, And
your phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over
• Operation From The Driver’s Seat. Bluetooth® the “Messaging” button will be grayed out
and the feature will not be available for use.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
NOTE: Uconnect® Phone SMS is only available when the
vehicle is not moving.

Once a message is received and viewed or listened to,

you will have the following options:
Read Messages: • Send a Reply
If you receive a new text message while your phone is • Forward
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will
be made to notify you that you have a new text message. • Call

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Send Messages Using Soft-Keys:
You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
a new message:
1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key,
2. Touch the “messaging” soft-key then “New Message,”
3. Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person
you wish to send the message to,

4. If multiple numbers are available for the contact select

which number you would like to have the message sent,
5. Press “Send” or “Cancel.”

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Send Messages Using Voice Commands: After the system confirms that you want to send your
message to John Smith, your message will be sent.
1. Press the button,
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Send message to John Smith mobile,”
3. After the system prompts you for what message you 3
want to send, say the message you wish to send or say
“List.” There are 18 preset messages.
While the list of defined messages are being read, you can
interrupt the system by pressing the button and
saying the message you want to send.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
List of Preset Messages: 10. I will be <number> minutes late.
1. Yes. 11. See you in <number> minutes.
2. No. 12. Stuck in traffic.
3. Okay. 13. Start without me.
4. I can’t talk right now. 14. Where are you?
5. Call me. 15. Are you there yet?
6. I’ll call you later. 16. I need directions.
7. I’m on my way. 17. I’m lost.
8. Thanks. 18. See you later.
9. I’ll be late.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the mobile
phone OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth® ON mode. 3
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
NOTE: 6. Send dial tones for automated systems is available
while a call is active. This is an example that uses a
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your Phonebook Record named “Voicemail Password.”
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send a
message to John Smith” and the system will ask you 7. Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but only
which phone number you want to send a message to for the first number encountered in a contact name will be
John Smith. sent. For example if there is a number stored in the 3
Home and Work numbers for the contact “Voicemail
2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or password” only the Home number will be sent.
“Other.”
8. If your phone does not support phonebook download or
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing call log download over Bluetooth® then these commands
Calls” or “Missed Calls.” will return a response that the contact does not exist in
the phonebook.
4. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone. 9. Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that have
been pre-loaded in the phonebook. Commands such as
5. These commands can be used during a phone call after “Call Emergency” and “Call Towing Assistance” will call
pushing the Uconnect® Voice Command button on the corresponding number stored with those contacts.
the steering wheel. Please note the call will be muted
while the VR session is active. NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
NOTE: 5. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send 6. You can replace “4” with any message number shown
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you on the screen.
which phone number you want to send a message to
7. If your phone does not support phonebook download 3
for John Smith.
or call log download over Bluetooth® then these
2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or commands will return a response that the contact does
“Other.” not exist in the phonebook.
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
4. Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect®
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth®.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold VOICE COMMAND
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite 3
following conditions: radio, disc player, SD Card, USB/iPod and
SiriusXM Travel Link.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command
user’s authority to operate the equipment. system as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Command system to recognize user voice
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking
• This device must accept any interference received, or a raised voice level.
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If no command is spoken the system will say one of two
WARNING!
responses:
Any voice commanded system should be used only • I didn’t understand
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at- • I didn’t get that, etc.
tention should be focused on safely operating the If a command is not spoken a second time, the system
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision will respond with an error and give some direction as
causing serious injury or death. what can be said based on the context you are in. After
When you press the Uconnect® Voice Command three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR
button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal session will end.
to give a command. Pressing the Uconnect® Voice Command button
while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.”
The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you
can say a command. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
“Help.” commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
These commands are universal and can be used from any To hear available commands, press the Uconnect® Voice
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon Command button and say “Help.” You will hear
the active application. available commands for the screen displayed.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at Natural Speech
3
a normal speaking volume.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
The system will best recognize your speech if the win- phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
set to low. and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to.”

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase Uconnect® Voice Commands
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly The Uconnect® Voice Command system understands
Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen- two types of commands. Universal commands are avail-
tence, the system identifies the topic or context and able at all times. Local commands are available if the
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who supported radio mode is active.
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized. Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect® Voice Com-
mand button.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a Changing The Volume
question to which the user can respond without pressing 1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
the Uconnect® Voice Command button. button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the Source
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com- To switch to the audio source, say “Change source to
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume Disc” for example. This command can be given in any
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio mode or screen:
system.
• “Track” (#) (to change the track) 3
Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session in
Radio/Player Modes
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when a
call is not active after pushing the Uconnect® Voice
Command button.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
NOTE:
1. You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM
frequency, such as “98.7 FM.”
2. You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite
station name received by the radio. 3
3. You can replace “8” with any other satellite channel
number received by the radio.
4. You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music
types.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
NOTE:
1. You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist,
podcast and audio book names with any correspond-
ing names on the current device that is playing.
2. You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is 3
currently playing. Command is only available when
CD is playing.
3. Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only
available when the iPod® is connected and playing.
4. VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are
based on the music metadata contained on the
loaded/connected device.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
NOTE:
1. You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the
sports league screen. For example you can say “Show
MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines.”
2. You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items 3
shown on a league screen. For example you can say
“Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA
Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball
Teams.”
3. You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show
extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or
“Show ski info” to get other forecasts.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
NOTE:
1. Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles.
2. You can replace “Player” with “Radio,” “Navigation,”
“Phone,” “Climate,” “More” or “Settings.”
3. Navigation commands only work if equipped with 3
Navigation.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
NOTE: SEATS
1. You can also say “Find City,” “Find Favorite,” “Find Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
Play by Category,” “Find Play by Name,” “Find Re- vehicle.
cently Found,” “Where to?” or “Go Home.”
WARNING!
2. You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant,” “Fuel,” 3
“Transit,” “Lodging,” “Shopping,” “Bank,” “Entertain- • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
ment,” “Recreation,” “Attractions,” “Community,” “Auto outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
Services,” “Hospitals,” “Parking,” “Airport,” “Police Sta- these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
tions,” “Fire Stations,” or “Auto Dealers.” or killed.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
face and shaded grey. vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
near the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up, down, Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
forward, rearward or to tilt the seat. move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.

Power Seat Switch

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
WARNING! (Continued)
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
or rear of the seat switch; the front or rear of the seat In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release which could result in serious injury or death.
the switch when the desired position is reached. 3
WARNING! CAUTION!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
control which could cause a collision and serious controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is
injury or death. stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped Heated Seats — If Equipped
The Power Lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
the driver’s seat. Push the switch forward to increase the may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the and seatbacks. The heated seats are operated using the
lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the Uconnect® System.
switch will raise or lower the position of the support.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.

(Continued)

Power Lumbar Switch

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
Touch the “Driver” or “Pass” seat soft-key (lo-
WARNING! (Continued)
cated on the Uconnect® display) once to select
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that HI-level heating. Touch the soft-key a second
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. time to select LO-level heating. Touch the soft-
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera- When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will 3
ture of the seat. provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
For Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect® 4.3: normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after ap-
Touch the CLIMATE hard-key (located on the left side of
proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
the Uconnect® display) to enter the climate control
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
screen.
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automati-
cally after approximately 45 minutes.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect® 8.4 and Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key
8.4 Nav: once to select HI-level heating. Press the soft-key
a second time to select LO-level heating. Press
Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the Uconnect®
the soft-key a third time to shut the heating
display.
elements OFF.

Controls Soft-Key Heated Seats Soft-Keys

NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information. 3
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
For models equipped with manual seats, the driver and
passenger seats can be adjusted forward or rearward by
using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near
the floor.
Manual Seat Adjustment
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located and
move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once
the desired position has been reached. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.

Recliner Adjustment
Seatback Release
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the
lever, lean back to the desired position and release the
lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright posi-
tion, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seatback is in the upright position.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
WARNING!
The seat height control lever is located on the outboard
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is side of the seat. Raise the lever to raise the seat. Lower the
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could lever to lower the seat. The total seat travel is approxi-
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be mately 2.15 in (55 mm).
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust 3
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.

Seat Height Adjustment Lever

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped Pull upward on the recline lever to fold or unfold the
This feature allows for extended cargo space. When the seat seat.
is folded flat, it is an extension of the load floor surface
(allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch up to the WARNING!
instrument panel). The fold-flat seatback also has a hardback
surface that you can use as a work surface when the seat is Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
folded flat and the vehicle is not in motion. dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. Adjust any seat only while
the vehicle is parked.

Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

Fold-Flat Seat

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be
WARNING!
split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop- and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu- When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad- of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. 3
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
event of a collision. certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Re-
Active Head Restraints (AHR) — Front Seats straints” in “Safety” for further information.

Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo-

nents, and vehicles with this equipment can not be
readily identified by any markings, only through visual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
downward on the head restraint. head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.

Push Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
3
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re-
straint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Supplemental
Active Head Restraints (AHR)/Resetting Active Head
Restraints (AHR)” in “Safety” for further information.

Active Head Restraint (Tilted)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints — Second Row Seats
WARNING!
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable head re-
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head straints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the
players. These items may interfere with the operation adjustment button, located on the base of the head
of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
and could result in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac-
tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Re-
straint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.

Adjustment Button

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
NOTE: Third Row Passenger Seats — Seven Passenger
Models
• The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If any of the These head restraints are non-adjustable and non-
head restraints require removal, see your authorized removable. However, you can fold them forward when
dealer. they are not in use by passengers. Refer to “50/50 Split
Third-Row Passenger Seats With Fold-Flat Feature — 3
• For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to Seven Passenger Models” for further information.
“Occupant Restraints” in “Safety”.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or
without having the head restraint unfolded and
improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or
locked in place. Failure to follow this warning may
death in the event of a collision. The head restraints
result in personal injury to the passenger in the event
should be checked prior to operating the vehicle and
of a collision.
never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
60/40 Split Second-Row Passenger Seats
WARNING! (Continued)
To provide additional storage area, each second-row • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
passenger seat can be folded flat. This allows for ex- vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
tended cargo space and still maintains some seating room belts.
if needed. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
NOTE: Prior to folding the second-row passenger seat, using a seat belt properly.
make sure the front seatback is not in a reclined position. • On seven passenger models, do not allow a passen-
This will allow the second-row seat to fold easily. ger to sit in a third row seat with the second row
seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the passenger
WARNING! could slide underneath the seat belt and be seri-
ously or even fatally injured.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
To Fold The Seat 3. Lift the control lever with the other hand, allow the
seatback to move forward slightly, and then release the
1. Locate the control lever on the lower outboard side of
lever.
the seat.
WARNING!
To prevent personal injury or damage to objects, 3
keep your head, arms, and objects out of the folding
path of the seatback.

4. Gently guide the seatback into the folded position.

Seatback Release
2. Place one hand on the seatback and apply a gentle
pressure.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Unfold The Seat
Raise the seatback and lock it in place.

WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.

Forward And Rearward Adjustment

The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat. Lift
Manual Seat Adjustment
the lever to move the seat forward or rearward. Release
the lever once the seat is in the desired position. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217

WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust 3
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.

Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is on the outboard side of the seat. To
recline the seatback, lean back, lift the lever, position the
seatback as desired, and then release the lever. To return
Recline Lever
the seatback to its normal upright position, lean back, lift
the lever, lean forward, and then release the lever once
the seatback is in the upright position.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Seatback/Armrest
Seatback/Armrest — Second Row Passenger Seat Raise the seatback/armrest and lock it in place when not
The latch release-loop is located at the top of the in use, or when additional seating area is required.
seatback/armrest. Pull the release-loop forward to re-
lease the latch and then downward to lower the
seatback/armrest.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
Move the control lever on the upper outboard side of the
WARNING!
seatback forward. Then, in one fluid motion, the seat
Keep the latch clean and free of objects and be cushion flips upward and the seat moves forward on its
certain that the seatback/armrest is locked securely tracks.
into position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An 3
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.

Stadium Tip ’n Slide™ (Easy Entry/Exit Seat) —

Seven Passenger Models
This feature allows passengers to easily enter or exit the
third-row passenger seats from either side of the vehicle.
To Move The Second-Row Passenger Seat Forward
NOTE: Raise the seatback/armrest before moving the
seat to allow for full seat travel.
Tip ’n Slide™ Control Lever

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in this posi-
tion, as it is only intended for entering and exiting
the third row seats. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury.

To Unfold And Move The Second-Row Passenger Seat

Rearward
Move the seatback rearward until it locks in place and
then continue sliding the seat rearward on its tracks until
it locks in place.
Tip ’n Slide™ Seat
NOTE: A hand-grip is molded into the front of each Push the seat cushion downward to lock it in place.
quarter trim panel near the door opening to assist entry Adjust the seat track position as desired. Using body
and exit from the third-row passenger seats. pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
To Fold The Seatback
WARNING!
Pull the latch release-loop located at the top of the
Be certain that the seatback and seat are locked seatback upward, push the seatback forward slightly, and
securely into position. Otherwise, the seat will not release the release-loop. Then, continue to push the
provide the proper stability for child seats and/or seatback forward. The head restraints will fold automati-
passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause cally as the seatback moves forward. 3
serious injury.

50/50 Split Third-Row Passenger Seats With

Fold-Flat Feature — Seven Passenger Models
To provide additional storage area, each third-row pas-
senger seatback can be folded flat. This allows for ex-
tended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating
room if needed.
NOTE: Prior to folding the third-row passenger seat-
back, make sure the second-row passenger seatback is
not in a reclined position. This will allow the seatback to
fold easily.
Seatback Release

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Unfold The Seatback The seatback can also be locked in the reclined position.
To do so, pull the latch release-loop located at the top of
Grasp the assist strap loop on the seatback and pull it
toward you to raise the seatback. Continue to raise the the seatback upward, allow the seatback to recline, and
seatback until it locks in place. Raise the head restraint to release the release-loop.
lock it in place.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
• Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
without having the head restraint unfolded and
locked in place. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury to the passenger in the
event of a collision.

(Continued)
Assist Strap

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
with the second row seatback(s) folded flat. In a
collision, the passenger could slide underneath the
seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.
3
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Outside of the vehicle, locate the safety latch lever
near the center of the grille between the grille and
hood opening. Push the safety latch lever to the right
and then raise the hood.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Underhood Safety Latch Hood Prop Rod

3. Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the
hole on the underside of the hood.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
LIGHTS
CAUTION!
Headlight Switch
To prevent possible damage:
• Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
is fully seated into its storage retaining clips. instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of
• Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, 3
downward push at the center front edge of the instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog
hood to ensure that both latches engage. Never lights.
drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.

WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
Headlight Switch lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking lights and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op-
eration.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Headlights On With Wipers (Available with To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
Automatic Headlights Only) while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
when the headlight switch is turned off.
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature. 3
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
If you turn the headlights, parking lights or ignition
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be switch ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System, refer to If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- turn off in the normal manner.
ment Panel” for further information.
NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable us-
Headlight Time Delay ing the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination — Customer Programmable Features” in “Understand-
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
unlit area.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped Fog Lights — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights will turn ON the first time The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
the vehicle is shifted out of PARK, and remain ON unless switch.
the parking brake is applied. Upon returning to the
PARK position, the DRLs will turn OFF. DRLs will turn
OFF when the ignition is switched OFF.
NOTE: The daytime running lights can be turned on and
off using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®
Settings — Customer Programmable Features” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
Fog Light Switch
when the driver’s door is opened.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and press the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates 3
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate when the low beam
headlights or parking lights are on. However, selecting
the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn Turn Signals
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
steering column.
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: High/Low Beam Switch
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is Flash-To-Pass
defective.
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
(if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either released.
turn signal on.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
3
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either turn the
ignition to the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Dimmer Controls
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is Dome Light Position
located on the left side of the instrument panel. Rotating
the dimmer control upward with the parking lights or Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
headlights on will increase the brightness of the instru- second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
ment panel lights, door map pockets and cupholders (if lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
equipped). position.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Light Defeat (OFF) WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
position. The interior lights will remain off when the the left side of the steering column.
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio
when the position lights or headlights are on.
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Refer to “Overhead Console” in “Un-
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located at the end of the lever. For information on using
the rear window wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window
Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
hicle”.
Intermittent Wiper System 3
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi-
tions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause
between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the wind-
shield wiper/washer control lever to one of the first five
detents to select the desired delay interval.
Front Wiper Control
There are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate
the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every two
seconds to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
between cycles at vehicle speeds below 10 mph
(16 km/h). At speeds greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the
delay varies from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between
cycles.
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Front Wiper Control
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper opera-
“park” position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while
tion.
they are operating. The wipers will resume operation
when you turn the ignition switch back to the ON
position.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
Windshield Washers
CAUTION!
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
• Turn the windshield wipers OFF when driving located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the the second detent.
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
is left in any position other than OFF.
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for
3
• In cold weather, always turn OFF the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the park position two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then
before turning OFF the engine. If the wiper switch resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
is left ON and the wipers freeze to the windshield, If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
damage to the wiper motor may occur when the the OFF position, the wipers will operate for two or three
vehicle is restarted. wipe cycles and then turn OFF.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the “park”
position. If the windshield wiper control is turned
OFF, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
WARNING!
Automatic Headlights Only)
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
could lead to a collision. You might not see other approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
windshield with the defroster before and during turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
windshield washer use.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
Mist Feature turned on or off using the Uconnect® System, refer to
Push the washer knob, located on the end of the multi- “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
function lever, inward to the first detent to activate a ment Panel” for further information.
single wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to
operate until you release the lever. This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to the steering column.
spray the windshield with washer fluid.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, pull the control handle upward until
fully engaged.

WARNING! 3
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Handle hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle serious injury or death.
downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect® System.
Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the “Heated
Controls Soft-Key
Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steering wheel.
Press the “Heated Wheel” soft-key a second time to turn
the heated steering wheel off.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information. 3
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
steering wheel to operate. cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the Electronic Speed Control Buttons
right side of the steering wheel.
1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES +
4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
WARNING!
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired You could lose control and have an accident. Always 3
vehicle set speed. leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be operate at the selected speed.
turned off when not in use.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Deactivate Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.0 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.0 km/h).
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with- To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
out erasing the set speed memory. set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
To Resume Speed will be established.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed (1.0 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
above 20 mph (32 km/h). the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.0 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting NOTE: Tap results of 1 mph or 1 km/h depends on
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- selection of US or METRIC units in the EVIC display
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button settings menu, or the RADIO settings menu (dependent
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to on vehicle configuration).
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
To Accelerate For Passing
WARNING!
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the could lose control and have an accident. Do not use 3
vehicle set speed. Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
moderate hills is normal. EQUIPPED
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed and audible indications of the distance between the rear
Control. fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense® Sys-
tem Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and
recommendations.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or ParkSense® Warning Display
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
changed to the ON/RUN position. Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect®
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-
REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Elec-
6 mph (9 km/h). tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in
ParkSense® Sensors Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.

Park Assist System Off

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
Park Assist Ready
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Slow Tone Fast Tone

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:

Continuous Tone

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance Greater than 79-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than
(in/cm) 79 in (200 cm) (200-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in (30 cm)
Audible Alert None Single 1/2- Slow Fast Continuous
Chime Second Tone
Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow
(Continuous) Flashing Flashing Flashing
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® When the ParkSense® soft-key is pressed to disable the
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled using the system, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS-
Uconnect® System. The available choices are: Off, Sound TEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect® Set-
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE
further information.
and the system is disabled, the EVIC will display the
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST” appears in the Electronic
System Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure the outer
surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc-
Assist system has detected a fault condition, the Elec-
tion and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will actuate a
to appear see an authorized dealer. 3
single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display
the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST”, “SERVICE PARK ASSIST”, If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST
or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to SYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
system has detected a fault condition, the EVIC will and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
display the ⬙CLEAN PARK ASSIST⬙, ⬙SERVICE PARK scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
ASSIST⬙, OR ⬙SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM⬙ mes- age the sensors.
sages for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
condition, ParkSense® will not operate.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions • Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
NOTE:
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, Failure to do so can result in the system not working
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system oper- properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
ating properly. obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
bumper.
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
• Ensure the ParkSense® system is OFF if objects such as
• When you turn ParkSense® off, the EVIC will display
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once you
12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
position and ParkSense® is turned off, the EVIC will the EVIC.
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251

CAUTION! WARNING!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to • Drivers must be careful when backing up even
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, 3
the sensors will not be detected when they are in obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
close proximity. You are responsible for safety and must continue to
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time can result in serious injury or death.
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when (Continued)
using ParkSense®.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
WARNING! (Continued)
EQUIPPED
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem- Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau-
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker tion note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem- The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false vehicle above the rear License plate.
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width The following table shows the approximate distances for
of the vehicle and will show separate zones that will each zone:
help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.

Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle

Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) 3
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)

WARNING! CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only be
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc- path.
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for the safety of your surroundings and must (Continued)
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
CAUTION! (Continued)
Touchscreen Radio
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to 1. Turn the Radio on.
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom- 2. Press the “More” soft-key.
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®. 3. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
4. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with 5. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview®
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. Backup Camera” to enable/disable.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,
storage for sunglasses, an interior observation mirror and
an optional power sunroof switch.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press in on
each lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle.
Press the lens a second time to turn each light off. You
may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the
outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows. 3

Overhead Console
Courtesy/Reading Lights
The overhead console has two courtesy lights. The lights
turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is
opened. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on when the
Courtesy/Reading Light
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is pressed. The

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunglasses Storage Interior Observation Mirror
To access the storage compartment, press on the raised The convex interior observation mirror provides the
bars on the compartment door in the center of the console driver and front seat passenger a wide field of view to
and release and the door will swing downward. conveniently view passengers sitting in the rear passen-
ger seats. To use the interior observation mirror, press on
the raised bars on the compartment door and release (the
door will swing downward), then raise the door until it is
almost closed and release. The door will latch in position
to use the interior observation mirror.
NOTE: From the “observation mirror” position, the door
can only be closed.
To return to the full open position, the door must first be
closed and then opened by pressing the latch again to
release.

Sunglasses Storage Compartment

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery. 3
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-
ent HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.

Observation Mirror
Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped
Refer to “Power Sunroof” in “Understanding the Fea-
tures of Your Vehicle” for further information.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner

NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® NOTE:
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming. programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis- erase channels when programming additional buttons.
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
3
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN For programming garage door openers that were manu-
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink® factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
indicator flashes. where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to pro-
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
Training The Garage Door Opener and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
1 — Door Opener lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
2 — Training Button
from slow to rapid.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, 3
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door follow these steps:
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
step after the LEARN button has been pressed. the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed Do not release the button.
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
activates, programming is complete. steps.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Non-Rolling Code 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) • To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to pro- repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in erase the channels.
view. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink® To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
button you want to program and the hand-held trans- follow these steps:
mitter button.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- Do not release the button.
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
remaining steps. door or gate motor.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) 3
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
several seconds of transmission. while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans- while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
time-out in the same manner. fully trained.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage follow these steps:
door may open and close while you are programming.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light. 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should Do not release the button.
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed. 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT remaining steps.
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
Using HomeLink® Troubleshooting Tips
To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink® If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed here are some of the most common solutions:
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener 3
time. to complete the training for a Rolling Code.

Security • Did you unplug the device for programming and

remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle. If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger- use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while tures. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
serious injury or death. assistance.

General Information
WARNING!
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Your motorized door or gate will open and close Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
while you are programming the universal trans- two conditions:
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by received including interference that may cause unde-
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage sired operation.
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device. 3
• The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

The power sunroof switch is located between the sun Power Sunroof Switch
visors on the overhead console.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
a location accessible to children. Do not leave the object, to project through the sunroof opening.
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter- Injury may result.
N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/Run mode. Occupants, Opening Sunroof — Express
particularly unattended children, can become en-
trapped by the power sunroof while operating the Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
in serious injury or death. cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could Open.” During Express Open operation, any movement
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode Sunroof Fully Closed
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward to Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
full open. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. sunroof is fully closed.
The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened
condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward Pinch Protect Feature
again. This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of 3
Closing Sunroof — Express the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. release to Express Close.
This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close opera-
tion, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof. Venting Sunroof — Express
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunshade Operation Sunroof Maintenance
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Ignition Off Operation
open. For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Wind Buffeting Information Center (EVIC)
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the position. Opening either front door will cancel this
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain feature.
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- For vehicles equipped with the EVIC
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 10
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to position. Opening either front door will cancel this
minimize the buffeting or open any window. feature.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
NOTE: The delay time if programmable using the
Uconnect® system. Refer to “Uconnect® System” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

3
A 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet located in the center
console below the radio. The power outlet has power
available when the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or
ACC position.

Front 12 Volt Power Outlet

This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit. To preserve the heating element, do not
hold the lighter in the heating position.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A second 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet is located inside A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the back
the center console storage area. Power is available with of the center console. This power outlet has power
the ignition switch in the ON/RUN, ACC or LOCK available when the ignition switch is in the LOCK, ON or
position. ACC position.

Center Console 12 Volt Power Outlet Rear Seat 12 Volt Power Outlet

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
A fourth fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® knob
quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This power outlet and element must be used.
has power available when the ignition switch is in the
ON or ACC position. CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) 3
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• The power outlet on the bottom of the center
console shares the fuse with the power outlet on
the back of the console. The combined usage must
not exceed 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.

Power Outlet Fuses

1 — F103 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin & Power Outlet
Console Rear
2 — F102 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel & Power
Outlet Left Rear Cargo Area

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275

CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long sory bracket from the plug.
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
3
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting. Your vehicle may be equipped with a 115 Volt AC
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, (150 Watt maximum) power outlet located on the back of
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat- the center console. This outlet can power mobile phones,
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit- electronics and other low power devices requiring power
tently and with greater caution. up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with will most power tools.
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power
outlet will shut down if the 115 Volt AC (150 Watt
maximum) power rating is exceeded.

WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
Power Inverter • Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload • Do not touch with wet hands.
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, • Close the lid when not in use.
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the shock and failure.
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
Power Inverter Operation CUPHOLDERS
The power inverter is turned on and off using the There are two cupholders, located in the center floor
Uconnect® System. console, for the front passengers.
Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect® 4.3
To turn the power inverter on or off perform the following: 3
1. Press the “More” hard-key (located next to the
Uconnect® display).
2. Press the “Outlet” soft-key (located on the Uconnect®
display) to turn the power inverter On or Off.
Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect® 8.4 and 8.4 Nav
To enable or disable the power inverter perform the
following:
1. Press the “Controls” soft-key. Floor Console Cupholders
For passengers in the second row there are two cuphold-
2. Press the “Outlet” soft-key to turn the power inverter ers, located in the center armrest between the two seats.
On or Off.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the armrest is folded flat the cupholders are in the In addition to cupholders, vehicles may also be equipped
back of the Head Restraint. The Head Restraint can be with bottle holders. The bottle holders are located on the
adjusted to better position the cupholders. door trim panels.

Armrest Cupholders Door Bottle Holder

For vehicles equipped with third row seating, there are
additional cupholders located in the trim panels.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279

WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burn-
ing the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury. 3
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel. Pull on the release handle to
open the glove compartment. Glove Compartment

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Floor Console Storage Center Console Storage
An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the floor There is a storage compartment located under the center
console. console armrest.

Floor Console Cubby Bin Center Console

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front of Sliding Armrest
the lid, to open the storage compartment. The center console armrest can also be slid rearward for
easy access to the storage area.

Opened Storage Compartment

Sliding Armrest

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distrac-
tion, resulting in death or injury.

Flip ’n Stow™ Front Passenger Seat Storage — If

Equipped
The seat latch release-loop is located in the center of the
Front Passenger Seat Storage Compartment
seat cushion between the seat cushion and the seatback.
Pull the loop upward to release the latch and then NOTE: Make sure that objects inside the bin do not
forward to open the seat to the detent position. interfere with the latch before closing the seat. Push the
seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it
latches to the base.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283

WARNING!
Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely
into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the
seat will not provide the proper stability for passen-
gers. An improperly latched seat cushion could cause 3
serious injury.

Second-Row Passenger Seat Temporary

Storage Bin
This is a temporary storage bin designed for use when
the seatback/armrest is down. Be sure to remove all
Seat Storage And Grocery Retainers
items from this bin before raising the seatback/armrest.
In-Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner
Second-Row Map Pocket And Grocery
Retainers — If Equipped NOTE: Position the front seat to at least a mid-track
position to provide easier access to the storage bin.
A map storage pocket and grocery retainers are located
on the back of the drivers seatback.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
An in-floor storage bin is located behind each front seat. The liner can be removed for easy cleaning by lifting on
Each 1.6 gal (5.9L) bin can hold up to 12, 12 oz (0.35L) the notches as shown.
cans, plus ice, or other items. The removable bin liner
allows for easy filling, emptying, and cleaning.
To access the bin, position the floor mat aside (if equipped).
Pull the door latch release-loop upward to release the latch
and then forward to open the bin door.

Removable Liner

In-Floor Storage

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
CARGO AREA FEATURES To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
Rechargeable Flashlight — If Equipped
The rechargeable LED flashlight stores in its charging station
in the left rear quarter trim panel. To remove it, press on the
indent on the side of the flashlight and release.
3

Three-Press Switch
NOTE: Be sure to return the flashlight to its charging
station when not in use to ensure it is ready for operation
the next time you need it.
Rechargeable Flashlight

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Management System Seven Passenger System Features
Five Passenger System Features • A large built-in storage bin with a hinged hardcover
located in the floor behind the third-row passenger
• A raised load floor that sits on top of a large built-in
seats.
storage bin.
• 60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat
• A tri-fold door built into the load floor that allows easy
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer
access to items in the built-in storage bin.
to “Seats” in “Understanding The Features of Your
• 60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat Vehicle” for further information.
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer
• 50/50 split third-row passenger seats with fold flat
to “Seats” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer
Vehicle” for further information.
to “Seats” in “Understanding The Features of Your
• An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature, Vehicle” for further information.
which extends cargo space even further. Refer to
• An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature,
“Seats” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
which extends cargo space even further. Refer to
hicle” for further information.
“Seats” in “Understanding The Features of Your Ve-
• Cargo tie-downs. hicle” for further information.
• A retractable cargo area cover (if equipped). • Cargo tie-downs.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
Cargo Tie-Downs

WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat
tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision, a tie-down
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come 3
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.

Cargo tie-downs are located on both rear trim panels.

These tie-downs should be used to secure loads safely
when the vehicle is moving.
Cargo Tie-Downs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
WARNING!
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle • To help protect against personal injury, passengers
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per- should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
vehicle: only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits de- use seat belts.
scribed on the label attached to the left door or left Retractable Cargo Area Cover (If Equipped) — Five
door center pillar. Passenger Models
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible. secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle. protect passengers from loose cargo.
Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the
behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to sway. cargo area behind the top of the rear seats.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
The cover, when extended, covers the cargo area to keep
items out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near the
liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place.
The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not
in use. You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to
make more room in the cargo area. 3
To install the cover, position it in the vehicle so that the
flat side of the housing faces upward. Then, insert either
the left or the right spring-loaded post (located on the
ends of the cover housing) into the left attachment point
or the right attachment point (shown).
Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover
Insert the spring-loaded post on the opposite end of the
cover housing into the attachment point on the opposite
side of the vehicle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Grab the cover handle and pull it toward you. As the
WARNING!
cover nears the liftgate opening, guide the rear attach-
ment posts (on both ends of the cover) into the notches in A cargo cover that is unsecured in the vehicle could
the trim panels. Lower the cover to position the posts into cause injury in a collision. It could become airborne
the bottom of the notches and release the handle. during a sudden stop and strike someone inside the
vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo
floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the
cover from the vehicle when taken from its mount-
ing. Do not store it in the vehicle.

Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rotate the switch upward to the first detent
position for rear wiper operation.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Rotate the switch upward past the first detent posi-
The rear window wiper/washer control is located on the
tion to activate the rear washer. The washer pump
left side of the steering column.
will continue to operate as long as the switch is held. Upon
release, the wiper will cycle three times before returning to 3
the set position.

Rear Wiper/Washer

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
• Turn the rear wiper off when driving through an
automatic car wash. Damage to the rear wiper may
result if the rear wiper switch is left in the ON
position.
• In cold weather, always turn off the rear wiper
switch and allow the rear wiper to return to the
park position before turning off the engine. If the
rear wiper switch is left on and the rear wiper
freezes to the window, damage to the rear wiper
motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control • Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned the rear wiper blade from returning to the park
to the LOCK position, the wiper will automatically return position. If the rear wiper control is turned off and
to the “Park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the the blade cannot return to the park position, dam-
wiper will resume function at whichever position the age to the rear wiper motor may occur.
switch is set at.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
Rear Window Defroster
CAUTION!

The rear window defroster button is located on Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the climate control panel. Press this button to turn the heating elements:
on the rear window defroster and the heated outside • Use care when washing the inside of the rear
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on 3
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap- and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
proximately 10 minutes. heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window defroster only when the engine is operating. window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED 2. Relocate the cross rails, aligning the cross rail stan-
chions (end pieces) with one of the vertical marks on
The roof rack cross rails and side rails are designed to
carry cargo weight. The load must not exceed 150 lbs the outboard surface of the side rail for proper posi-
tioning. There are four frontward marks for the front
(68 kg), and it should be distributed uniformly over the
cross rails. In addition, the roof rack does not increase the cross rail and four rearward marks for the rear cross
rail. Make sure the cross rails remain equally spaced or
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the
total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the roof parallel at any position for proper function.
rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity. 3. Tighten the knobs on each cross rail to lock it in
NOTE: Metal crossbars are offered by MOPAR® acces- position. As you tighten the knob, make sure the
clamp tooth engages completely into the side rail slot.
sories. See your authorized dealer.
To Move The Cross Rails 4. Attempt to move the cross rail to ensure that it is
locked in position.
1. Loosen the knobs on top of each cross rail approxi-
mately six turns to disengage the clamp tooth from the
side rail.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
NOTE:
CAUTION!
• To help control wind noise when installing the cross
rails, make sure the arrows marked on the underside • Cross rails should remain equally spaced or paral-
of the cross rails face the front of the vehicle. lel at any luggage rack position for proper function.
Noncompliance could result in damage to the roof
• To help reduce the amount of wind noise when the rack, cargo, and vehicle. 3
cross rails are not in use, fasten the front cross rail in • To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
the fourth position from the front and the rear cross not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
rail in the eighth position. The tie down holes on the 150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute loads as evenly as
cross rail ends should always be used to tie down the possible and secure the load appropriately.
load. Check the straps frequently to be sure that the • Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
load remains securely attached. such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with
large frontal area should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING!

• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to loads. sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
This is especially true on large flat loads and may cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .300 ▫ Oil Change Due . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 ▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
4
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .302 ▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION ▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
▫ Tire PSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . .323
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ EVIC White Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ Turn Menu OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ EVIC Amber Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ EVIC Red Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 ▫ Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio . . .355
▫ Customer Programmable Features — ▫ VES™ Remote Control — If Equipped . . . . . . .356
Uconnect® 4.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
▫ Remote Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
▫ Locking The Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Uconnect® System 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .360
䡵 Uconnect® MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES™) — IF ▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .361
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ Single Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 ▫ System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1. . . . . .353
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Important Notes For Single Video Screen
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .374
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
▫ Right-Hand Switch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio ▫ Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media (i.e., CD) ▫ Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) —
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .375 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) With
Touchscreen — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 4
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .376
▫ Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Side Window Demist Outlet 6 — Switch Bank 11 — Engine Start/Stop Button

2 — Air Outlet 7 — Uconnect® Hard Controls 12 — Hood Release Lever
3 — Instrument Cluster 8 — SD Memory Card Slot 13 — Dimmer Controls
4 — Uconnect® System 9 — Power Outlet 14 — Headlight Switch
5 — Glove Compartment 10 — CD/DVD Slot

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 3. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
1. Tachometer The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD II, that
(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area, monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage. trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb
2. Air Bag Warning Light does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
during starting, stays on, or turns on while engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for not require towing.
further information.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
4. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
CAUTION!
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine Light” comes on continuously with the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and running, a malfunction has been detected in
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic the ESC system. If this light remains on after
converter damage and power loss will soon occur. several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
Immediate service is required. several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph 4
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
WARNING! to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced NOTE:
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal • Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such previously.
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
others. sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Turn Signal Indicators 7. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn This indicator will illuminate when the front
signal when the turn signal lever is operated. fog lights are on.

8. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display

If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven / Odometer Display
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the distance the vehicle has been driven.
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb. U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
6. High Beam Indicator correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
This indicator shows that the high beam head- odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever for- technician should leave the odometer reading the same
ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam. then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was 10. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
should be checked monthly when cold and in-
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or
must be reset at zero.
tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard
4
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
instrument cluster. For further information, refer to As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”. equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
9. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving approximately one minute and then remain continuously
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
low tire pressure telltale.
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not to continue to function properly.
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
CAUTION!
Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound.
The TPMS has been optimized for the original Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
warning have been established for the tire size 12. Brake Warning Light
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re- This light monitors various brake functions,
placement equipment that is not of the same size, including brake fluid level and parking brake 4
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause application. If the brake light turns on it may
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
11. Seat Belt Reminder Light
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/ master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
the driver or front passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled, a System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving,

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
WARNING!
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
dropped below a specified level. Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi- turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
the brake fluid level checked. proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
sary.
inspected by an authorized dealer.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
tion. brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
14. Speedometer
13. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
Indicates vehicle speed. 4
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition 15. Fuel Door Reminder
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it vehicle.
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However, 16. Fuel Gauge
the conventional brake system will continue to operate The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on. the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
CAUTION!
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
until the vehicle is disarmed.
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
18. Temperature Gauge the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off imme-
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera- diately and call an authorized dealer for service.
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
WARNING!
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood
yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the
warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap para-
graph.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
(EVIC) information by pressing the switches mounted on the
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Radio Info
instrument cluster.
• Fuel Economy
• Vehicle Speed
4
• Trip Info
• Tire Pressure
• Vehicle Information
• Warning Message Displays
• Turn Menu OFF

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by • UP Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Press and release the UP button to scroll up-
wheel:
ward through the main menus (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units)
and sub-menus.
• DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and
sub-menus.
• SELECT Button
Press and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus or sub-menus. Press and hold
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons the SELECT button for two seconds to reset
features.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
• BACK Button The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙
previous menu.
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) into several categories:
Displays • Five Second Stored Messages
The EVIC display consists of three sections: 4
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
1. The top line where compass direction, odometer line message takes control of the main display area for five
and outside temperature are displayed. seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
2. The main display area where the menus and pop up condition that activated it remains active) and can be
messages are displayed. reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long
3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odom- as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the
eter line. EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙
and ⬙Low Tire Pressure⬙.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Unstored Messages The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle). the following messages:
• Unstored Messages Until RUN Remote start aborted — Door ajar
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Press Brake Remote start aborted — Fuel low
Pedal and Push Button to Start⬙.
Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
• Five Second Unstored Messages
Remote start active — Push Start Button
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message
takes control of the main display area for five seconds and Vehicle Not in Park
then returns to the previous screen. Examples of this mes- Key Left Vehicle
sage type are ⬙Memory System Unavailable - Not in Park⬙
and ⬙Automatic High Beams On⬙. Key Not Detected

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start Service TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure Monitor” in “Starting And
Service Keyless System
Operating”
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if the
Channel # Transmit
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with either
turn signal on) Channel # Training
Lamp Out (with vehicle graphic showing which of the 4 Channel # Trained
turn signals is/are out). 4
Clearing Channels
Key Battery Low (with a single chime)
Channels Cleared
Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more doors open,
Did Not Train
with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/ h])
Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting And
Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
Operating”)
Low Tire Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to infor-
Oil Change Due (with a single chime)
mation on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure Monitor” in
“Starting And Operating”

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC White Indicators • Electronic Speed Control SET
This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell- This light will turn on when the electronic
tales. These telltales include: speed control is SET. For further information,
• Shift Lever Status refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,5,4,3,2,1” are displayed
indicating the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1” EVIC Amber Indicators
indicate the Autostick™ feature has been engaged and This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell-
the gear selected is displayed. For further information on tales. These telltales include:
Autostick™ , refer to “Starting And Operating.”
• Low Fuel Light
• Electronic Speed Control ON
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
This light will turn on when the electronic (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
speed control is ON. For further information, fuel is added.
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
EVIC Red Indicators • Oil Pressure Warning Light
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the
telltales include: light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
• Door Ajar the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for
four minutes when this light turns on.
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. 4
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single
• Charging System Light
chime.
• Liftgate Ajar This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is ajar. ignition switch is first turned ON/RUN and remain on
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
chime. while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the charging system light remains on, it means that the If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho- rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
rized dealer. flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
require towing.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
light will come on when the ignition is first
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
CAUTION!
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve- Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
WARNING!
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light 4
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
This light indicates that the transmission fluid Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
temperature is running hot. This may occur nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
light turns on, safely pull over and stop the cause a fire.
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Change Due 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will 3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next OFF/LOCK position.
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each Fuel Economy
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system the SELECT button. The following Fuel Economy func-
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform tions will display in the EVIC:
the following procedure:
• Average Fuel Economy
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.) • Miles Per Gallon (MPG)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
Average Fuel Economy Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. When Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel economy is reset, the display will read “RESET” or the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history information determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
fuel average reading before the reset. tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT
button.
4
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
Fuel Economy

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Miles Per Gallon (MPG) Trip Info
This display shows the instantaneous MPG in bar graph Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Trip
form while driving. This will monitor the gas mileage in Info” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
real-time as you drive and can be used to modify driving SELECT button. Pressing the SELECT button with ⬙Trip
habits in order to increase fuel economy. Info⬙ highlighted will cause the EVIC display to show
Trip A, Trip B, and Elapsed Time all in one display. If you
Vehicle Speed
want to reset one of the three functions you use the UP or
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle DOWN buttons to highlight (select) the feature that you
Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Press the want to reset. Pressing the SELECT button will cause the
SELECT button to display the current speed in mph selected feature to reset individually. The three features
or km/h. Pressing the SELECT button a second time will can only be reset individually. The following Trip func-
toggle the unit of measure between mph or km/h. tions display in the EVIC:
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle • Trip A
Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
EVIC. • Trip B
• Elapsed Time

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa- Tire PSI
tion: Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire
Trip A PSI:” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Press the SELECT
button to view a graphic of the vehicle with a tire
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
pressure value at each corner of the graphic.
reset.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Trip B
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle 4
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
reset.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
Elapsed Time available information displays.
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset. • Coolant Temp
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
ON/RUN position.
• Oil Temperature
To Reset The Display
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the SELECT button once to
clear the resettable function.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Oil Pressure Turn Menu OFF
Displays the actual oil pressure. Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button. Press-
ing the SELECT button blanks the menu display. Pressing
• Trans Temperature
any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the
Displays the actual transmission temperature. menu back.
• Engine Hours Uconnect® SETTINGS
Displays the number of hours of engine operation. The Uconnect® system uses a combination of soft and
Messages hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel
that allows you to access and change the customer
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Mes- programmable features.
sages: XX” displays highlighted in the EVIC. If there is
more than one message, pressing the SELECT button will Hard-Keys
display a stored warning message. Press and release the Hard-Keys are located on the left and right side of the
UP and DOWN buttons if there is more than one message Uconnect® 4.3 screen. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter
to step through the remaining stored messages. If there control knob located on the right side of the Climate
are no message, pressing the SELECT button will do Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the
nothing.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
control knob to scroll through menus and change settings NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
(i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of the control knob one or time.
more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Soft-Keys
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect® Touchscreen.
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 4.3 Settings 4
In this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to access
programmable features that may be equipped such as
Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors &
Locks, Heated Seats, Engine Off Operation, Compass
Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth® and SIRIUS Setup
through hard-keys and soft-keys.
1 — Uconnect® 4.3 Settings Hard-Key

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the ⬙Settings⬙ hard-key to access the Settings screen, Display
use the Page Up/Down soft-keys to scroll through the • Brightness
following settings. Touch the desired setting soft-key to
change the setting using the description shown on the Touch the Brightness soft-key to change this display.
following pages for each setting. When in this display, you may select display brightness
with the headlights on and the headlights off. Adjust the
brightness with the + and – setting soft-keys or by
selecting any point on the scale between the + and –
soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Mode
Touch the Mode soft-key to change this display. When in
this display, you may select one of the auto display
settings. To change Mode status press and release the
Day, Night or Auto soft-key, then by touch the arrow back
soft-key.

Uconnect® 4.3 Soft-Keys

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
• Language • Voice Response
Touch the Language soft-key to change this display. Touch the Voice Response soft-key to change the Voice
When in this display, you may select one of three Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip Length, press and release the Brief or Long soft-key. Then
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch touch the arrow back soft-key.
the English, French (Français) or Spanish (Español) soft-
• Touch Screen Beep
key to select the language preferred. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key. As you continue, the information Touch the Touch Screen Beep soft-key to turn on or shut 4
will display in the selected language. off the sound heard when a touch screen button (soft-
key) is pressed. To change the Touch Screen Beep setting
• Units
press and release the ON or OFF soft-key, then touch the
Touch the Units soft-key to change this display. When in arrow back soft-key.
this display, you may switch the EVIC, odometer, and
navigation system (if equipped) between US and Metric
units of measure. Touch US or Metric then touch the
arrow back soft-key. As you continue, the information
will display in the selected units of measure.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clock • Sync Time — If Equipped
• Set Time Touch the Sync Time soft-key to change this display.
Touch the Set Time soft-key to change this display. When When in this display, you may have the radio set the time
in this display, you may select the time display settings. automatically. To change the Sync Time setting, press and
To make your selection, touch the Set Time soft-key, release the ON or OFF soft-key. Then touch the arrow
adjust the hours and minutes using the up and down back soft-key.
soft-keys, select AM or PM, select 12 hr or 24 hr. Then Safety / Assistance
touch the arrow back soft-key when all selections are
• Park Assist
complete.
Touch the Park Assist soft-key to change this display. The
• Show Time Status
Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the
Touch the Show Time Status soft-key to change this vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
display. When in this display, you may turn on or shut off and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The
the digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show system can be enabled with Sound Only, Sound and
Time Status setting, press and release the ON or OFF Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park Assist status,
soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key. press and release the OFF, Sound Only or Sounds and
Display soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in “Understand- the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function (RKE) transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach
and operating information. status, touch the 0, 30, 60 or 90 soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
• Headlights With Wipers
Touch the Hill Start Assist soft-key to change this display.
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) Touch the Headlights With Wipers soft-key to change this
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control display. When this feature is selected, and the headlight 4
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn
and operating information. To make your selection, touch on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned
the Hill Start Assist soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
touch the arrow back soft-key. turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers soft-
Lights
key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow back
• Illuminated Approach soft-key.
Touch the Illuminated Approach soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the headlights will
activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Auto High Beams “SmartBeams™” • Steering Directed Lights — If Equipped
Touch the Auto High Beams soft-key to change this Touch the Steering Directed Lights soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the high beam display. When this feature is selected, the headlights turn
headlights will deactivate automatically under certain relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To
conditions. To make your selection, touch the Auto High make your selection, touch the Steering Directed Lights
Beams soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow
arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If back soft-key.
Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
• Flash Lights With Lock
Vehicle” for further information.
Touch the Flash Headlights With Lock soft-key to change
• Daytime Running Lights — If Available
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights
Touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key to change will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature
will turn on whenever the engine is running. To make may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock
your selection, touch the Daytime Running Lights soft- feature selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash
key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow back Headlights With Lock soft-key and select ON or OFF.
soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Doors & Locks • Flash Lights With Lock
• Auto Unlock On Exit Touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key to change this
Touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft-key to change this display. When this feature is selected, the front and rear
display. When this feature is selected, all doors will turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or
unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s ter. To make your selection, touch the Flash Lights With
door is opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Lock soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key. 4
Unlock On Exit soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then
touch the arrow back soft-key. • Sound Horn With Remote Start
• Auto Lock Touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key to
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto- change this display. When this feature is selected, the
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To
(24 km/h). To make your selection, touch the Auto Lock make your selection, touch the Sound Horn With Remote
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, Start soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the
indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the arrow back soft-key.
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Sounds Horn With Lock NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
Go® (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to
Touch the Sounds Horn With Lock soft-key to change this
Unlock All Doors On 1st Press, all doors will unlock no
display. When this feature is selected, the horn will chirp
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
grasped. If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection,
programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when
touch the Sounds Horn With Lock soft-key and select ON
the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if
or OFF. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed,
• Remote Door Unlock Order touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening. If Unlock Driver Door Only
Touch the Remote Door Unlock Order soft-key to change
On 1st Press is selected, once the driver door is opened,
this display. When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press
the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to
is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first
unlock all the doors (or use the RKE transmitter).
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
UNLOCK button. When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st
Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of the
doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
• Passive Entry (Keyless Enter-N-Go®) Engine Off Options
Touch the Passive Entry soft-key to change this display. • Headlight Off Delay
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s Touch the Headlight Off Delay soft-key to change this
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock display. When this feature is selected, the driver can
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, touch the choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or
Passive Entry soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the
the arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in Headlight Off Delay status, touch the 0, 30, 60 or 90
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. 4
soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Heated Seats • Engine Off Power Delay
• Auto Heated Seats — If Equipped
Touch the Engine Off Power Delay soft-key to change this
Touch the Auto Heated Seats soft-key to change this display. When this feature is selected, the power window
display. When the temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C) switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),
the Driver’s heated seat will turn on. To make your DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
selection, touch the Auto Heated Seats soft-key and select equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow back soft-key. 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
Engine Off Power Delay status, touch the 0 seconds, 45 the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
arrow back soft-key. module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
Compass Settings
• Variance
Touch the Variance soft-key to change this display. Com-
pass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North
and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences,
the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is
driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the compass
will automatically compensate for the differences, and
provide the most accurate compass heading.

Compass Variance Map

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
• Calibration Audio
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This • Equalizer
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to Touch the Equalizer soft-key to change this display.
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the When in this display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
calibrate the compass by touching the ON soft-key and between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free 4
soft-key.
from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
will now function normally. finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and an
environment free from large metallic objects such as build- • Balance / Fade
ings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc. Touch the Balance / Fade soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Speed Adjusted Volume SIRIUS Setup
Touch the Speed Adjusted Volume soft-key to change this • Channel Skip
display. This feature increases or decreases volume rela- SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of
tive to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
Volume, press the OFF, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
arrow back soft-key. your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the
• Surround Sound — If Equipped channels you would like to skip. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
Touch the Surround Sound soft-key to change this dis-
play. This feature provides simulated surround sound • Subscription Info
mode. To make your selection, press the Surround Sound New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with
back soft-key. your radio. Following the expiration of the free services,
Phone / Bluetooth® it will be necessary to access the information on the
Subscription Information screen in order to re-subscribe.
• Paired Devices
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub-
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
scription Information screen.
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on time.
the screen or visit the provider online. When making a selection, touch the soft-key to enter the
NOTE: SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription. desired mode. Once in the desired mode touch and
release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect® next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
System 8.4 Settings lected.
4
Touch the More soft-key, then touch the Settings soft-key Once the setting is complete touch the Back Arrow
to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the X
Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable soft-key to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
features that may be equipped such as Display, Clock, Up or Down Arrow soft-keys on the right side of the
Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation, Compass available settings.
Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth® and SIRIUS Setup.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display • Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings When in this display, you may select the brightness with
will be available. the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
• Display Mode setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
When in this display you may select one of the auto soft-key.
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch the • Set Language
arrow back soft-key. When in this display, you may select one of three
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
When in this display, you may select the brightness with the Set Language soft-key and then touch the desired
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and – language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
soft-key.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
• Units • Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC, When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed sound heard when a touch screen button (soft-key) is
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US or pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft-key until a
Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting, check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. to return to the previous menu.
4
• Voice Response Length • Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re- When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
Length, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until a designated turn within a programmed route. To make
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that your selection, touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key Cluster soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
to return to the previous menu. setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Fuel Saver Display In Cluster — If Equipped • Set Time Hours
The “ECO” message is located in the instrument cluster When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The Sync
display, this message can be turned on or off. To make with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To make
your selection, touch the Fuel Saver Display soft-key, your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust the
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing hours up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
soft-key to return to the previous menu. close out of the settings screen.
Clock • Set Time Minutes
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
will be available. Sync with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To
• Sync with GPS Time — If Equipped make your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust
the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key
When in this display, you may automatically have the to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
radio set the time. To change the Sync with GPS Time close out of the settings screen.
setting touch the Sync with GPS Time soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
• Time Format Safety / Assistance
When in this display, you may select the time format After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key the fol-
display setting. Touch the Time Format soft-key until a lowing settings will be available.
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting, • Park Assist
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE-
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 4
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the (18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time Sound and Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park
Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft-key Assist status, touch and release the OFF, Sound Only or
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that Sounds and Display button. Then touch the arrow back
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in
to return to the previous menu. “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for sys-
tem function and operating information.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ParkView® Backup Camera and operating information. To make your selection, touch
the Hill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-mark appears
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
menu.
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a Lights
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will will be available.
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your • Headlight Illumination On Approach
selection, touch the ParkView® Backup Camera soft-key, When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
to return to the previous menu. transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped touch the + or - soft-key to select your desired time
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) previous menu.
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped • Daytime Running Lights — If Available
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi- whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until a
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
if they were turned on by this feature. To make your has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers soft-key, until a return to the previous menu.
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has 4
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the • Steering Directed Lights — If Equipped
previous menu. When this feature is selected, the headlights turn relative
• Auto Dim High Beams “SmartBeam™” — If Equipped to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To make
your selection, touch the Steering Directed Lights soft-
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
your selection, touch the Auto High Beams soft-key, until a
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu. Refer to “Lights/ SmartBeam™ — If
Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Flash Headlights With Lock On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash when
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be selected with • Auto Lock
or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
your selection, touch the Flash Headlights with Lock soft- matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that (24 km/h). To make your selection, touch the Auto Lock
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
return to the previous menu. indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the
Doors & Locks back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following • Flash Headlight With Lock
settings will be available.
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash
• Auto Unlock On Exit when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection,
touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key, until a check-
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
the previous menu.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
• Sound Horn With Lock • 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,
the remote start is activated. To make your selection, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a check- Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK but-
mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has ton. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to
the previous menu. unlock the passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors
On 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the 4
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed to Unlock All Doors
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
1st Press, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If Driver Door
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
1st Press is programmed, only the driver’s door will
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive
return to the previous menu.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is programmed touching • Horn With Remote Start
the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
door opening. If driver door first is selected, once the
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use RKE
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
transmitter).
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
• Passive Entry return to the previous menu.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s • Auto-On Driver Heated Seat With Vehicle Start — If
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless Equipped
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat will
your selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a
automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
(4.4° C). To make your selection, touch the Auto Heated
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
Seats soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
Go®” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle.”
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
soft-key the following settings will be available.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
Engine Off Options Delay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the fol-
return to the previous menu.
lowing settings will be available.
• Engine Off Power Delay Compass Settings

When this feature is selected, the power window After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the follow-
switches, radio, Uconnect® system (if equipped), DVD ing settings will be available.
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), • Variance 4
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
door will cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds, 45 seconds, 5
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the arrow
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
back soft-key.
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
• Headlight Off Delay heading.
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the • Perform Compass Calibration
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptop
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This
Computers and Radar Detectors. This is where the com-
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to
pass module is located, and it can cause interference with
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the
the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
compass may appear erratic and it may need to be
calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by press-
ing the ON soft-key and completing one or more
360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings
will be available.
• Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Compass Variance Map Fade settings.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
• Equalizer • Music Info Cleanup
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and This feature helps organize music files for optimized
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – music navigation. To make your selection, touch the
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale Music Info Cleanup soft-key, select On or Off followed by
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back pressing the arrow back soft-key.
soft-key.
Phone/Bluetooth®
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® soft-key the fol- 4
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch lowing settings will be available.
directly on the desired setting.
• Paired Devices
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume to the Uconnect® Supplement.
touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key. SiriusXM Setup
After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft-key the following
settings will be available.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Channel Skip Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
the screen or visit the provider online.
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the
channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the Uconnect® MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
arrow back soft-key. ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES™) — IF
EQUIPPED
• Subscription Information
Your rear seat Video Entertainment System (VES™) is
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free designed to give your family years of enjoyment. You can
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio play your favorite CDs or DVDs, listen to audio over the
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of
services, it will be necessary to access the information on standard video games or audio devices. Please review
the Subscription Information screen in order to re- this Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features
subscribe. and operation.
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub-
scription Information screen.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
Getting Started • With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position,
turn the radio on by pushing the ON/OFF Volume
• Screen located in the overhead console: Unfold the
Control knob.
overhead LCD screen by pushing the button on the
overhead console behind the screen. • When the Video Screen is open and a DVD is inserted
into the radio, the screen turns on automatically, the
headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins.
Single Video Screen 4
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES™).
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)

Overhead Video Screen

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Play A DVD NOTE: The VES™ system will retain the last setting
when turned off.
1. Press the EJECT button on the radio faceplate (Touch-
screen). Play Video Games
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the input jacks located on the back of the center console.
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks)
starts playing the first track. on the rear of the center console enable
3. Ensure the VES™ Remote Control and the Headphone the monitor to display video directly
switch is on Channel 1. from a video camera, connect video
games for display on the screen, or play
Using The Remote Control music directly from an MP3 player.
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
1. Video in (yellow)
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight DISC by
2. Left audio in (white)
either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press 3. Right audio in (red)
ENTER on the Remote Control.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES™
1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key.
jacks:
2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to display
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playsta-
the Rear Entertainment Controls.
tion3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the
vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter 3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, touch the
section in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more “Power” soft-key.
information. 4
4. Touch the “1” or “2” soft-key for the channel desired
Ensure the remote control channel selector switch and and press “Source” soft-key to select the desired
Headphone switch (IR channel) are the same number. mode.
Using The Remote Control Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control. Video Is Playing On Channel 1
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX
Channel 2.
2, by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or
by repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press
ENTER on the Remote Control.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Remote Control 4. Touch the “1” or “2” soft-key for the channel desired
and press “Source” soft-key to select the desired
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control and
mode.
the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the Important Notes For Single Video Screen System
bottom of the screen.
• VES™ is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio
2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/ simultaneously.
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight
• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1
the desired audio source or repeatedly press the
and right side equates to Channel 2.
MODE button on the remote until the desired audio
source appears on the screen. • If a video source is selected on Channel 1, then
Channel 2 is for audio only.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
• When selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key.
will display on the screen and the audio will be heard
2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to display on Channel 1 in the headphones.
the Rear Entertainment Controls.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, touch the when the Video Screen is closed.
“Power” soft-key.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio NOTE:
1. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio • The VES™ system will retain the last setting when
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the turned off.
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
• Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio screen is not
starts playing the first track.
available in some regions or locations, the vehicle must
Using The Remote Control be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the PARK
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In 4
vehicles with manual transmission the parking brake
2. While looking at the Video Screen, highlight DISC by must be engaged even when the vehicle is parked.
either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by Refer to local and state laws.
repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press
• Touching the screen on a Touchscreen radio while a
ENTER.
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control func-
tions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause,
FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner
will turn off the remote control screen functions.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls VES™ Remote Control — If Equipped
1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key.
2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to display
the Rear Entertainment Controls.
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, touch the
“Power” soft-key.
4. Touch the “1” or “2” soft-key for the channel desired
and press “Source” soft-key to select the desired mode.

Remote Control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Controls And Indicators 5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, press to seek the next tunable
station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast forward
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone
through the current audio track or video chapter. In
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
audio while the screen is closed, press the Power button menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
to turn the headphone transmitter on. 6. 䉲 / Prev – In radio modes, press to select to the
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is previous station. In disc modes, press to advance to
pressed, the currently affected channel or channel the start of the current or previous audio track or
video chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the 4
button is illuminated momentarily.
menu.
3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after 7. MENU – Press to return to the main menu of a DVD
five seconds. disc, to select a satellite audio or video channel from
the Station list, or select playback modes (SCAN/
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which chan- RANDOM for a CD).
nel is being controlled by the remote control. When the
selector switch is in the Channel 1 position, the remote 8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 (right 9. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play.
side of the screen). When the selector switch is in the
Channel 2, position the remote controls the functionality
of headphone Channel 2 (left side of the screen).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. PROG Up/Down – When listening to a radio mode, is selected and the disc is stopped, press the SETUP
pressing PROG Up selects the next preset and press- button to access the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD
ing PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in Setup Menu of this manual.)
the radio.
16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, press to
11. MUTE – Press to mute the headphone audio output return to the previous screen. When navigating a
for the selected channel. DVDs disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s
contents.
12. SLOW – Press to slow playback of a DVD disc. Press
play (䉴) to resume normal play. 17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, press to seek to the previous
tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast
13. STATUS – Press to display the current status.
rewind through the current audio track or video
14. MODE – Press to change the mode of the selected chapter. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
channel. See the Mode Selection section of this
18. ENTER – Press to select the highlighted option in a
manual for details on changing modes.
menu.
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, press the SETUP
19. 䉱 / NEXT – In radio modes, press to select to the
button to access the display settings (see the display
next station. In disc modes, press to advance to the
settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select
next audio track or video chapter. In menu modes,
the menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded
use to navigate in the menu.
in the DVD player (if equipped) and the VES™ mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
Remote Control Storage
The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compart-
ment for the remote control which is accessible when the
screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not
try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very
difficult to remove. To return the remote back into its
storage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the 4
two retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back
up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back
into position.
The Remote Control Storage

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Locking The Remote Control Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op-
parental control feature. eration. To replace the batteries:
1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key. • Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to display
the Rear Entertainment Controls. • Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Touch the “Lock-out” soft-key to lock the remote
control. Pressing the “Lock-out” soft-key a second • Replace the battery compartment cover.
time will unlock the remote control.
Headphones Operation
NOTE: Remote control lock-out will only apply to the The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
current ignition cycle. The VES™ will automatically using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
remove the lock-out if the ignition is cycled to “OFF”.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
position and that the channel is not muted and the
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully Replacing The Headphone Batteries
charged batteries are installed in the headphones. Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
operation. To replace the batteries:
• Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover
downward.
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them 4
according to the polarity diagram shown.
• Replace the battery compartment cover.

1 – Volume Control
2 – Power Button
3 – Channel Selection Switch
4 – Power Indicator

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controls NOTE:
The headphone power indicator and controls are located • When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is
on the right ear cup. controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 1.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve • When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned
approximately three minutes after the rear video system to the audio of the VES™ Channel 2.
is turned off. 2. Press the MODE button on the remote control.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector as a DVD Video), pressing STATUS shows the status
switch is in the same position as the headphone on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen.
selector switch. Pressing the MODE button will advance to the next
mode. When the mode is in an audio only source (such
as FM), the Mode Selection menu appears on screen.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen, What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navi- does not cover any damage or defect that results from
gate to the available modes and press the ENTER misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
button to select the new mode. by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replace-
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the
ment foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
BACK button on the remote control.
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULT- 4
Warranty ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DE-
FECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers
FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PU-
particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wireless
NITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transferable.
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
as long as you own the Product. consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
use is defective in workmanship or materials. jurisdiction to jurisdiction.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
What Will Unwired® Do? Unwired®, at its option, will System Information
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired® reserves
Information Mode Display
the right to replace any discontinued Product with a
comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PROD-
UCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES
(EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY
OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICU-
LAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Unwired® wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293-
3332 or email customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com.
You may register your Unwired® wireless headphones
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at
1-888-293-3332. When information mode is active, the current mode setting
for both audio channels is displayed. In addition to the
items called out by number, the remaining information

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
displays the current status of the source (such as station Mute: when the Mute icon is displayed, the audio for
frequency, name, preset or track number, song title, artist Channel 2 has been muted using the remote control’s
name, album name, etc.). MUTE button.
1. Channel 1 Mode – Displays the current source for 4. Channel 2 Mode — Displays the current source for
Channel 1. Channel 2.
2. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute — Audio: The audio 5. Remote Locked Out—When the icon is displayed, the
only icon is not used on Channel 1, in a single screen remote control functions are disabled. 4
system. Mute: when the Mute icon is displayed, the
6. Clock — Displays the time.
audio for Channel 1 has been muted using the remote
control’s MUTE button. 7. Channel 1 Shared Status — When the icon is dis-
played, the audio for Channel 1 is also shared with the
3. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute — Audio: Only in a
radio and playing through the cabin speakers.
single screen system: The audio only icon is displayed
on Channel 2 when Channel 1 is in a video mode.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Numeric Keypad Menu When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2
shows DIRECT TUNE, pressing the remote control’s
ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu. This
screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency or
track number. To enter the desired digit:
1. Press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲,
䉴, 䉳) to navigate to the desired digit.
2. When the digit is highlighted, press the remote con-
trol’s ENTER button to select the digit. Repeat these
steps until all digits are entered.
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and
press the remote control’s ENTER button.
Numeric Keypad Menu 4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go
button and press the remote control’s ENTER button.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Station List Menu Options Menu
When listening to Satellite audio, pressing the remote
control’s MENU button displays a list of all available
channels. Navigate this list using the remote control’s
navigation buttons to find the desired station, press the
remote control’s ENTER button to tune to that station. To
jump through the list more quickly, navigate to the Page
Up and Page Down icons on the screen. 4
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressing
the remote control’s MENU button displays a list of all
commands which control playback of the disc. Using the
options you can activate or cancel Random play.
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the “Options”
soft-key activates the Options Settings menu. From this
menu you can adjust Audio, Subtitles, Angle and Title.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display Settings Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the remote screen closed:
control’s SETUP button activates the Display Settings
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
menu. These settings control the appearance of the video
on the screen. The factory default settings are already set • Close the video screen.
for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these
• To change the current audio mode, press the remote
settings under normal circumstances.
control’s MODE button. This will automatically select
To change the settings, press the remote control’s navi- the next available audio mode without using the
gation buttons to select an item, then press the remote MODE/SOURCE Select menu.
control’s navigation buttons to change the value for the
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
currently selected item. To reset all values back to the
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
original settings, select the Default Settings menu option
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
and press the remote control’s ENTER button.
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
are installed in the headphones.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
Disc Formats DVD Audio Support
The DVD player is capable of playing the following types When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the DVD player,
of discs (12 cm or 8 cm diameter): the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default
• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the
Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program mate-
notes about DVD Region Codes)
rial is automatically mixed down to two channels, which
• Audio Compact Discs (CDs) may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If you
4
• CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio increase the volume level to account for this change in
format files level, remember to lower the volume before changing the
disc or to another mode.
• Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
Recorded Discs
DVD Region Codes
The DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
The DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
geographic region. These region codes must match in CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R,
disc does not match the region code for the player, the DVD-RW and DVD-ROM discs.
disc will stop playing and a warning will be displayed.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may • The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
be cases where the DVD player may not be able to play folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
help avoid playback problems, use the following guide-
lines when recording discs. If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
playable in the DVD player, check with the disc recording
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
software publisher for more information about burning
closed are playable.
playable discs.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD-
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
(CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R and DVD-RW) is with a perma-
each track number is unique.
nent marker. Do not use adhesive labels as they may
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the separate from the disc, become stuck, and cause perma-
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or UDF format. nent damage to the DVD player.
CD-DA may also be used for PCM Audio contained on
CD-Based Data.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
Compressed Audio Files (MP3, WMA AND ACC) • Any file that is copy protected (such as those down-
loaded from many online music stores) will not play.
The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1
The DVD player will automatically skip the file and
Audio Layer 3 with data bitrates from 32 to 320 kbit/s,
begin playing the next available file.
including variable bit rates), WMA (All Standard 8.x, 9.x
Windows Media Audio) and ACC (MPEG-4 audio; sam- • Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
pling frequencies 8 to 48 kHz; mono and stereo) audio Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD
files with the from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or player will automatically skip the file and begin play-
CD-RW). ing the next available file. 4
• The DVD player always uses the file extension to • If you are creating your own files, the recommended
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙, WMA files and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or ⬙WMA⬙, between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
and ACC files must end with the extensions “.acc” or supported. For both formats, the recommended
“.m4a”. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
these extensions for any other types of files.
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
• For MP3 files, ID3 tag data v1, v1.1, v2 and v2.4 (such DVD player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next file, or
as artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported. the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current or
previous file.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• To change the current directory, use the remote con- The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot
trol’s PROG UP and Down buttons or Rewind/skip conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior tempera-
back and fast fwd/skip forward. ture is above 120°F (49°C). When this occurs, the DVD
player will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut off the
Disc Errors
display until a safe temperature is reached. This shut-
If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙ down is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD
message is displayed on the Radio display and the disc is player.
automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible
Product Agreement
disc format are all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙
message. This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by intended for home or other limited viewing uses other-
skipping forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end wise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
of the disc is reached, the DVD player will return to the disassembly is prohibited.
beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the
first track.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Dolby® Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL
under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙, This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
⬙MLP Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of plugged into the USB port.
Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works. Copy-
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
right 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
General Information
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation visit Apple’s website for software updates. 4
is subject to the following two conditions:
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supple-
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. ment Manual.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS Right-Hand Switch Functions
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear • Press the top of the switch to increase the volume.
surface of the steering wheel. The left and right-hand
controls are rocker-type switches with a pushbutton in • Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume.
the center of each switch. Reach behind the steering • Press the button in the center of the switch to change
wheel to access the switches. modes (i.e., AM, FM, etc.).
Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio Operation
• Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable
station up from the current setting.
• Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next
listenable station down from the current setting.
• Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to
the next preset that you have programmed.

Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media (i.e., CD) CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
Operation To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
• Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next precautions:
track.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
• Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to surface.
the beginning of the current track or to listen to the
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
wiping from center to edge. 4
seconds after the current track begins to play.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
• Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the
ing the disc.
second track, three times to listen to the third track,
and so forth. 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
• Press the button located in the center of the switch to
change to the next preset that you have programmed. 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular CLIMATE CONTROLS
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coat- The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
ing removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known system can be operated through either the instrument
good disc before considering disc player service. panel or through the Uconnect® system display.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Ra-
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in dio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated display.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If
Equipped
Hard-Keys
Hard-keys are located on the left and right side of the
Uconnect® 4.3 screen in the center of the instrument
panel. There are also hard-keys located below the
Uconnect® touch screen. 4

Uconnect® 4.3 Manual with Touchscreen Climate

Hard-Key

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.

Manual Temperature Controls — Hard-Keys

Uconnect® 4.3 Manual 3 — Zone Temperature Controls

— Soft-Keys

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And
Soft-keys)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator 4
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
Uconnect® 8.4 Manual 3 — Zone Temperature Controls indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
— Soft-Keys function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Front Defrost Button
CAUTION!
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
the heating elements:
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is • Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
soaking with warm water.
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
system will return the previous setting.
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
5. Rear Defrost Button window.
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
6. Rear Climate Button — If Equipped 8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Press and release this button to turn on the rear climate
controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear Provides the passenger with independent temperature
climate controls are ON. Performing this function again control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
will turn OFF the rear climate controls.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button automatically exit Sync.
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only) 4
9. SYNC
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
control. Push the button for warmer temperature set-
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
tings.
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
automatically exit Sync. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
Sync will automatically exit this feature.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. Blower Control 11. Modes
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
forced through the climate system. There are seven comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The as follows:
speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys • Panel Mode
as follows: Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
Hard-Key panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
The blower speed increases as you turn the control the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to
Soft-Key shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. • Bi-Level Mode
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
area between the icons. floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister
outlets.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con- 13. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and (Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
warmer air from the floor outlets.
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
• Floor Mode control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
window demister outlets. adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
• Mix Mode time. 4
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window 14. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or (Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
snowy conditions.
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
12. Climate Control OFF Button control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
ON/OFF. adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
15. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 4.3 Only) NOTE:
Press the driver or passenger temperature soft-key to • For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem- of the windows.
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera-
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
tures. Driver and passenger have independent tempera-
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
ture control if Sync mode is not illuminated.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
Climate Control Functions
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
A/C (Air Conditioning) cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. the front of the radiator and through the condenser.
When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehu- MAX A/C
midified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For
improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mance.
mode settings. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level
or Floor modes.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX A/C lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature
is ON. may be unavailable (soft button greyed out). The Recircu-
lation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the
selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
control button to blink and then turn off. 4
Recirculation Control
Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If
Equipped
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
The rear MTC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
air through the headliner outlets.
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle. The rear system temperature control soft-keys are located
in the Uconnect® touch system, located on the instru-
ment panel.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Uconnect® 4.3 Manual Rear Climate Soft-Key Controls Uconnect® 8.4 Manual Rear Climate Soft-Key Controls
Screen Screen
1 — Blower Up Soft-Key 5 — Done Soft-Key 1 — Rear Lock Soft-Key 5 — Blower Up Soft-Key
2 — Mode Soft-Key 6 — Rear Lock Soft-Key 2 — Front Climate Control Soft-Key 6 — Mode Soft-Key
3 — Temperature Soft-Key 7 — Rear Off Soft-Key 3 — Temperature Up Soft-Key 7 — Blower Down
4 — Blower Down Soft-Key 4 — Temperature Down Soft-Key Soft-Key
8 — Rear Off Soft-Key

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The Rear Lock
Front Uconnect® Touchscreen
• Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock soft-key on the
The Three-Zone climate control system allows for adjust- Uconnect® touchscreen, illuminates a lock symbol in
ment of the rear climate controls from the front ATC the rear display. The rear temperature and air source
panel. are controlled from the front Uconnect® system.
To change the rear system settings: • Rear occupants can only adjust the rear control when
• Press ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear control the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off. 4
mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control func- • The rear MTC is located in the headliner, near the
tions now operate rear system. center of the vehicle.
• To return to Front screen, press ⬙REAR⬙ button again,
or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.

CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the right side trim panel. The rear outlets are located
in the right side trim panel. Do not block or place
Rear MTC Control Features objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
1 – Blower Speed 3 – Rear MODE outlets. The electrical system could overload causing
2 – Rear Temperature 4 – Rear Temperature Lock damage to the blower motor.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
Rear Temperature Control Bi-Level Mode
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower floor outlets.
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the tempera-
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
ture. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
Uconnect® system.
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
When rear controls are locked by the Uconnect® system, 4
Floor Mode
the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature
knob is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments Air comes from the floor outlets.
are ignored.
Rear Mode Control
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) With
Touchscreen — If Equipped
Hard-Keys
Hard-keys are located on the left and right side of the
Uconnect® 4.3 screen in the center of the instrument
panel. There are also hard-keys located below the
Uconnect® touch screen.

Uconnect® 4.3 Automatic Climate Hard-Key

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.

Automatic Temperature Controls — Hard-Keys

Uconnect® 4.3 Automatic 3 — Zone Temperature

Controls — Soft-Keys

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And
Soft-keys)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic 3 — Zone Temperature indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
Controls — Soft-Keys function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
4. AUTO Operation Button 6. Rear Defrost Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
this function will cause the ATC to switch between An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
Operation” for more information. turns off after 10 minutes.
5. Front Defrost Button 4
CAUTION!
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea- Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side the heating elements:
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is • Use care when washing the inside of the rear
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate soaking with warm water.
system will return the previous setting.
(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive Provides the passenger with independent temperature
window cleaners on the interior surface of the control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
window. NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. automatically exit Sync.
7. Rear Climate Button — If Equipped 10. SYNC
Press and release this button to turn on the rear climate Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
climate controls are ON. Performing this function again enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
will turn OFF the rear climate controls. temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Sync will automatically exit this feature.
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
11. Blower Control
control. Push the button for warmer temperature set-
tings. Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatically exit Sync.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The • Panel Mode
speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
as follows: panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
Hard-key adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up
The blower speed increases as you turn the control and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to
speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise. shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
4
Soft-key outlets.
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting • Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
through the defrost and side window demister
area between the icons.
outlets.
12. Modes
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, warmer air from the floor outlets.
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Floor Mode 15. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
of air is directed through the defrost and side
trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or time.
snowy conditions. 16. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 4.3 Only)
13. Climate Control OFF Button Press the driver or passenger temperature soft-key to
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
ON/OFF. compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem-
14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera-
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- tures. Driver and passenger have independent tempera-
trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings. ture control if Sync mode is not illuminated.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
MAX A/C NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor- lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature
mance. Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and may be unavailable (soft button greyed out). The Recircu-
the prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX lation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve
A/C is ON. window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled
automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the
adjusted to desired user settings. control button to blink and then turn off. 4
Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
to switch to the prior settings and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off. Automatic Operation
Recirculation Control 1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (4) on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high
humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger tem-
Recirculation control button. The recirculation perature hard or soft control buttons (7, 8, 13, 14). Once
indicator will illuminate when this button is selected. Push the desired temperature is displayed, the system will
the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
and allow outside air into the vehicle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is Manual Operation Override
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi- The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-
system to function automatically.
trol.
NOTE: The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
comfort as quickly as possible. circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
this section of the manual. selected in Manual operation.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
4
The rear system temperature control soft-keys are located
in the Uconnect® touch system, located on the instru-
ment panel.

Uconnect® 4.3 Automatic Rear Climate Soft-Key

Controls Screen
1 — Blower Up Soft-Key 2 — Mode Soft-Key
3 — Temperature Soft-Key 4 — Blower Down Soft-Key
5 — Done Soft-Key 6 — Rear Lock Soft-Key
7 — Rear Auto Soft-Key 8 — Rear Off Soft-Key

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
• Press ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear control
mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control func-
tions now operate rear system.
• To return to Front screen, press ⬙REAR⬙ button again,
or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Rear Climate Soft-Key Rear Lock
Controls Screen
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock soft-key on the
1— Rear Auto Soft-Key 2 — Rear Lock Soft-Key Uconnect® touchscreen, illuminates a lock symbol in the
3— Front Climate Soft-Key 4 — Temperature Up Soft-Key
rear display. The rear temperature and air source are
5— Temperature Down Soft- 6 — Blower Up Soft-Key
Key 8 — Blower Down Soft-Key controlled from the front Uconnect® system.
7— Mode Soft-Key
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
9— Rear Off Soft-Key
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
The rear ATC is located in the headliner, near the center • Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
of the vehicle. Uconnect® touchscreen. This turns off the Rear Tem-
perature Lock icon in the rear temperature knob.
• Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
• ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO. 4
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
Rear ATC Control Features system to function automatically.
1 – Blower Speed 3 – Rear MODE NOTE: It is not necessary to move the temperature
2 – Rear Temperature 4 – Rear Temperature Lock settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automati-
cally adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to
provide comfort as quickly as possible.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Blower Control Rear Temperature Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off, To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the the temperature, and clockwise to increase the tempera-
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. ture. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the
Uconnect® system.
CAUTION! When rear controls are locked by the Uconnect® system,
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in knob is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments
the right side trim panel behind the third row seats. are ignored.
The rear outlets are located in the right side trim Rear Mode Control
panel of the 3rd Row seat. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater Auto Mode
outlets. The electrical system could overload causing • The rear system automatically maintains the correct
damage to the blower motor. mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat
occupants.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
Headliner Mode Operating Tips
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
Summer Operation
to one side will shut off the airflow.
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
Bi-Level Mode
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the sion protection and to protect against engine overheating. 4
floor outlets. A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended.
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Floor Mode
Winter Operation
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vacation Storage • Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati-
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication Outside Air Intake
to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again. Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
Window Fogging collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and slush, and snow.
provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes
A/C Air Filter
a problem, increase the blower speed. Vehicle windows tend
to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather. The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
NOTE:
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
• Recirculation mode without A/C should not be used “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruc-
for long periods, as fogging may occur. tions.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
Manual Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .419
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 ▫ Four-Speed or Six-Speed Automatic
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 5
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F
Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 䡵 AUTOSTICK® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 䡵 ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . .430
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .417 䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .430
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .418 ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 408 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 ▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .443
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 ▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .454
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .456
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .440
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .440
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .461
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .443

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 409
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .472
▫ All Season Tires — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .465 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .473
▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires — If 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .474
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ Premium System – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 5
And Wheel — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . .467
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Full Size Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .468
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .486
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 410 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 ▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .495
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .496
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . .492
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 411
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer ▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504 MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .512

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 412 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
belts. touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever.
WARNING! • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the in a location accessible to children), and do not
keyless ignition node is in the ⴖOFFⴖ mode, remove leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ACC or RUN mode. A child
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with could operate power windows, other controls, or
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in move the vehicle.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 413
Automatic Transmission
CAUTION! (Continued)
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
before shifting into any driving gear. idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
CAUTION! is firmly on the brake pedal.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
ing precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL 5
into any forward gear when the engine is above This feature allows the driver to oper-
idle speed. ate the ignition switch with the push
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to of a button, as long as the Remote
a complete stop. Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob
is in the passenger compartment.
(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 414 STARTING AND OPERATING
Normal Starting To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. Place the shift lever/shift selector in PARK, then press
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. If the shift lever/shift selector is not in PARK, the
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
seconds or three short presses in a row with the
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain
the engine starting, press the button again. in the ACC position until the shift lever/shift selector
is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
position. If the shift lever/shift selector is not in PARK
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed
accelerator pedal.
once, the EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will remain
running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
position, or it could roll.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 415
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in to place the ignition to the RUN position (EVIC will
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30 display “ON/RUN”),
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
OFF position.
return the ignition to the OFF position (EVIC will
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions – With display “OFF”).
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
NEUTRAL Position)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail- 5
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
and START. To change the ignition positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps:
• Starting with the ignition in the OFF position,
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (EVIC will display
“ACC”),

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 416 STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the cies” for further information.
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
serious personal injury. START/STOP Button)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans- “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter 1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
and vehicle. 2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster hold it.
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type 3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 417
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10 The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release hour to have an adequate effect on the engine.
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
between the headlight assembly and the Totally Inte-
After Starting grated Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver’s side of
the vehicle.
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
WARNING!
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater 5
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a electrical cord could cause electrocution.
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 418 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
CAUTION! • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow- foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
ing precautions are not observed: could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or
a complete stop. something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at brake pedal.
idle speed. • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU- in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle never exit a vehicle while the engine is running.
speed. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the
is firmly pressing the brake pedal. engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When the
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against un-
shifting out of PARK. wanted movement.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 419
Key Ignition Park Interlock
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
fob and lock your vehicle. lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with before the engine can be turned OFF. This helps the
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a placing the transmission in PARK.
number of reasons. A child or others could be This system also locks the transmission in PARK when-
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be ever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal 5
or the shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in or Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
children), and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 420 STARTING AND OPERATING
Four-Speed or Six-Speed Automatic Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
Transmission accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
The transmission gear position display (located in the Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. shifting between these gears.
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Inter- TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick® shift positions. Manual
lock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift control
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further informa-
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a tion). Moving the shift lever into the AutoStick® (+/-)
position (below the Drive position) activates Autostick®
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
mode, providing manual shift control and displaying the
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
current gear in the instrument cluster.
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 421
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range. 5
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
Shift Lever
brake.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 422 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
WARNING! (Continued)
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi- • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
grade. PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
WARNING! if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move- someone or something. Only shift into gear when
ment and possible injury or damage. the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 423

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the number of reasons. A child or others could be
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis- or the shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in or
sion is locked in the PARK, securing the vehicle near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to 5
against unwanted movement. children), and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC
fob and lock your vehicle. or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 424 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
CAUTION!
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you • With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF will not move out of PARK.
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift REVERSE (R)
lever could result. This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this stop.
can damage the drivetrain.
NEUTRAL (N)
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
tion:
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 425
DRIVE (D)
WARNING!
This range should be used for most city and highway
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
practices that limit your response to changing traffic automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
or road conditions. You might lose control of the DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
vehicle and have a collision. tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
CAUTION! when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi- 5
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A information) to select a lower gear. Under these condi-
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” tions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
for further information. extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 426 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat- Transmission Limp Home Mode
ing limits, the powertrain controller will modify the Transmission function is monitored electronically for
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
prevent transmission damage due to overheating. Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may in second gear (for four-speed transmission) or third gear
be modified depending on engine and transmission (for six-speed transmission) regardless of which forward
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im- gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter without damaging the transmission.
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold tempera- In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
tures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
limited to only second gear (for four-speed transmission) following steps:
or third gear (for six-speed transmission). Normal opera-
tion will resume once the transmission temperature has 1. Stop the vehicle.
risen to a suitable level. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 427
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position. Overdrive Operation
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (top gear). The transmission will
5. Restart the engine. automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con-
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no ditions are present:
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal • The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
operation.
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom- perature.
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your 5
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has • The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera-
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could ture.
recur. • The vehicle speed is sufficiently high and the driver is
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer not heavily pressing the accelerator.
service is required.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 428 STARTING AND OPERATING
Torque Converter Clutch AUTOSTICK®
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. providing manual shift control, giving you more control
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati- of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize en-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly gine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and down-
different feeling or response during normal operation in shifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during system can also provide you with more control during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages. passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain
driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm Operation
(usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because When the shift lever is in the AutoStick® position (below
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter the DRIVE position), it can be moved from side to side.
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission This allows the driver to manually select the transmission
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. gear being used. Moving the shift lever to the left (-)
Using the AutoStick® shift control, when the transmis- triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift. The
sion is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 429
In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will shift up or • You can start out, from a stop, in any gear except top
down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in
(+) or left (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed second gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in
condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear snow or icy conditions.
until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
described below.
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is en-
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
gaged.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the 5
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
AutoStick® is engaged.
display the current gear.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
fault or overheat condition is detected.
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the To disengage AutoStick® mode, return the shift lever to
vehicle is accelerated. the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the
AutoStick® position at any time without taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 430 STARTING AND OPERATING
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
WARNING!
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their launch and performance characteristics.
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury. CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
(AWD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.
If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted Acceleration
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
rear wheels. erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 431
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
WARNING!
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. become visible.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle 4. Keep tires properly inflated.
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and 5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.). sudden stop.
Traction DRIVING THROUGH WATER 5
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Driving through water more than a few inches/
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 432 STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
WARNING! shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water and Warnings before doing so.
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface CAUTION!
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. • Always check the depth of the standing water
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry before driving through it. Never drive through
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
warning may result in injuries that are serious or the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. • Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 433

CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING!

• Driving through standing water may cause damage • Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans- (8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., • Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
driving through standing water. Do not continue to distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami- ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. 5
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited • Failure to follow these warnings may result in
Warranty. injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can sengers, and others around you.
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 434 STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability does not in any way damage the steering system.
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost. WARNING!

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will Continued operation with reduced power steering
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi- assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers. CAUTION!
NOTE: Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
there is a problem with the power steering system. possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 435
Power Steering Fluid Check
WARNING!
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici- parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho- not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
rized dealer. power steering fluid.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated

CAUTION! level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all 5
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
system as the chemicals can damage your power Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the correct fluid
steering components. Such damage is not covered by type.
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 436 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.

Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 437
NOTE:
WARNING!
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
before attempting to move the vehicle. ment and possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unattended
It does not show the degree of brake application. children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front reasons. A child or others could be seriously or 5
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake lever. Do not leave the key fob in or near the
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is RUN mode. A child could operate power windows,
not in the vehicle. other controls, or move the vehicle.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 438 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
failure and a collision. brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav- systems loses normal capability, the remaining
ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or system will still function. However, there will
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll evident by increased pedal travel during application and
and cause damage or injury. greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In
addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the
hydraulic system, the “Brake Warning Light” will turn on
CAUTION! as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder.
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
authorized dealer immediately. brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 439
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
WARNING!
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
• Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up to help
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnor- avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. Refer to
mally high brake temperatures, excessive lining “Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)” under “Electronic Brake
wear, and possible brake damage. You would not Control System” in this section for more information.
have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
• Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light” WARNING!
on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking 5
performance or vehicle stability during braking The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
may occur. It will take you longer to stop the from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control. traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ABS
You could have a collision. Have the vehicle cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting
checked immediately. from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slip-
pery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an
ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 440 STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
brake control system commonly referred to as ESC. This
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake
working properly. This self check occurs each time the
Assist System (BAS), Traction Control System (TCS),
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), Trailer Sway Control (TSC) and Hill Start ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
Assist (HSA). These systems work together to enhance stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
both vehicle stability and control in various driving clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
conditions. debris, or panic stops.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most • The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps” short time after the stop),
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent • The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
wheel lock-up.
• Brake pedal pulsations, and

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 441
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
WARNING! (Continued)
of the stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
These are all normal characteristics of ABS. ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
WARNING! by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip- the traction afforded.
ment that may be susceptible to interference • The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those
caused by improperly installed or high output resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
radio transmitting equipment. This interference another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. 5
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa- • The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
bility. Installation of such equipment should be never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
performed by qualified professionals. manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish the safety of others.
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident. All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to accurate signals for the computer.
slow down or stop.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 442 STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake Light If both the Brake System Warning Light and the ABS
Light remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake Force
The Anti-Lock Brake Light monitors the ABS. Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immedi-
The light will turn on when the ignition switch ate repair to the ABS system is required.
is turned to the ON position and may stay on Brake Assist System (BAS)
for as long as four seconds.
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
If the ABS Light remains on or comes on while driving, it capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
is not functioning and that service is required. However, ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
the conventional brake system will continue to operate applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
normally if the Brake System Warning Light is not on. reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best
If the ABS Light is on, the brake system should be
BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
must apply continuous braking pressure during the
Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS Light does not come on
stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 443
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
WARNING!
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
prevent accidents, including those resulting from the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery Control (ESC)” in this section for more information.
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS- Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by 5
the user’s safety or the safety of others. monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
Traction Control System (TCS) of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
stability. A feature of the TCS functions similar to a evasive driving maneuvers.
limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 444 STARTING AND OPERATING
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot This system enhances directional control and stability of
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or rects for over-steering and under-steering the vehicle by
other vehicles. applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
WARNING! the desired path.
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi- The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
tions, and driving conditions, influence the chance that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM- the condition of over-steer or under-steer.
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize • Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than
the user’s safety or the safety of others. appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 445
ESC Operating Modes
WARNING!
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, Full On
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in- vehicle is started the system will be in this mode. This
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro- should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional information.
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate 5
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, Partial Off
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa- The “ESC OFF” button is located in the switch bank
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be above the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off”
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which mode, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” button and the
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of “ESC OFF” Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the
others. ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” button
and the “ESC OFF” Indicator Light will turn off. This will
restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 446 STARTING AND OPERATING
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pressing the “ESC OFF” button. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off ” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC (except for the limited slip feature de-
scribed in the TCS section) has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off ”mode, the engine power
reduction of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced
ESC OFF Button vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving reduced.
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, • Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC
OFF” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 447
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
ESC OFF Indicator Light flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON driving to the prevailing road conditions.
position. It should go out with the engine NOTE:
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen- 5
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho- will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected. • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo- when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as that caused the ESC activation.
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 448 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off. • TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) tongue weight recommendations. Refer to ”Vehicle
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces- Loading” and “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and
sively swaying trailer. TSC activates automatically once Operating” for further information.
the excessively swaying trailer is recognized. When TSC • If TSC activates while towing a trailer, stop the
is functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indica- vehicle at the nearest safe location and adjust the
tor Light” will flash, the engine power will be reduced, trailer load to eliminate the trailer sway.
and you will feel the brake being applied to individual • Failure to follow these warnings can result in an
wheels in an attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. accident or serious personal injury.

NOTE: The TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in

the “Partial Off” mode.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 449
Hill Start Assist (HSA) • Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The WARNING!
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded 5
the intended direction of travel. vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
HSA Activation Criteria could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to Always remember the driver is responsible for brak-
activate: ing the vehicle.
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 450 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing With HSA
WARNING! (Continued)
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade • HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
when pulling a trailer. parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
WARNING! • Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
brake pedal is released there may not be enough parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
hill and this could cause a collision with another NOTE: The HSA system may also be turned on and off if
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration, mation Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas- mation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is ment Panel” for further information.
responsible for braking the vehicle.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 451
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE:
Tire Markings • P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire 5
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards 4 — Maximum Load letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
Code (TIN) 5 — Maximum Pressure ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
2 — Size Designation 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
3 — Service Description Temperature Grades

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 452 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com- standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 453

EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
5
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 454 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 455

EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
5
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 456 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 457
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information Placard 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 458 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
spare tires.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Loading The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You the weight referenced here.
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 459
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not 5
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 460 STARTING AND OPERATING

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
cause collisions.
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
overload them.
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure.
5
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 462 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
right or left. ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom- stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
mended cold tire inflation pressure. sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
Economy
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat-
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
terns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear
patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling vehicle to drift left or right.
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 463
Tire Inflation Pressures Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
At least once a month: 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
may look properly inflated even when they are under- of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated. temperature changes. 5
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the
CAUTION!
winter.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al- Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which could damage the valve stem. which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 464 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
WARNING!
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low. High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high 75 mph (120 km/h).
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original WARNING!
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 465
Tire Repair All Season Tires — If Equipped
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
meets the following criteria: summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
(sidewall damage is not repairable). failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped 5
additional information. Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
driving conditions. For more information, contact a au-
service description (Load Index and Speed Code).
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all
season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 466 STARTING AND OPERATING
Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
Snow Tires
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires checked before using these tire types.
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
Wheel — If Equipped
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
safety and handling of your vehicle.
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph tire rotation pattern.
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 467
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
WARNING!
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You
can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and only. With these spares, do not drive more than
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. 5
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled Full Size Spare — If Equipped
on your vehicle at the first opportunity. The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
wheel on the vehicle at any given time. spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 468 STARTING AND OPERATING
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
WARNING!
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity. Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the of vehicle control.
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 469
Tire Spinning Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced.
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.

WARNING! 5
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. 1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 470 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
WARNING!
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further infor- follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
mation. You could lose control and have a collision resulting
Life Of Tire in serious injury or death.

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
factors including, but not limited to: exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
• Driving style
Replacement Tires
• Tire pressure
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
• Distance driven characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main- lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
tenance schedule is highly recommended. when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 471
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
WARNING!
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex- of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this pension dimensions and performance characteris-
manual for more information relating to the Load Index tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
and Speed Symbol of a tire. braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously sion components. You could lose control and have 5
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
those of the original wheels. approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire capacity, other than what was originally equipped
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure index could result in tire overloading and failure.
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect You could lose control and have a collision.
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 472 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Due to limited clearance, P225/65R17 tire with a
WARNING! (Continued)
Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having traction device or equivalent is recommended.
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control. WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
CAUTION!
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
CAUTION!
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
following precautions:
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
against damage.
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as important that only traction devices in good condi-
recommended by the traction device manufacturer. tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
• Install on Front Tires Only. (Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 473
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove different loads and perform different steering, driving,
the damaged parts of the device before further use. and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re- unequal rates.
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain 5
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave- mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
ment. smooth, quiet ride.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
suggested operating speed of the device manufac- unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). performed.
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 474 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross” TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
reversed. mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the
Tire Rotation vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 475
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
and natural pressure loss through the tire. (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still 5
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
value.
Telltale Light” will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 476 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

• The TPMS has been optimized for the original • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
warning have been established for the tire size prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op- stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
eration or sensor damage may result when using toring Sensor.
replacement equipment that is not of the same size, NOTE:
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after- failure or condition.
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
your vehicle to your local dealership to have your while adjusting your tire pressure.
sensor function checked.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 477
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes Base System
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
stopping ability. wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- readings to the receiver module.
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level and to maintain the proper pressure.
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor- 5
ing Telltale Light.” The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Receiver Module

and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
the tire.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 478 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
TIRE” message will be displayed and a chime will sound also sound a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled, this
when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still
road tires. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
displayed. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your system fault can occur due to any of the following:
vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recom-
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
mended cold placard pressure value, as shown in the
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
TPMS sensors.
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
and “LOW TIRE” message will turn off. The vehicle may that affects radio wave signals.
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
housings.
information.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 479
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. 4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
NOTE: remain on solid.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni- reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
tor the pressure in the compact spare tire. the TPMS will update automatically and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off, as
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The 5
ing limit, a chime will sound and the “Tire Pressure
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn on and a “LOW
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
TIRE” message will be displayed for a minimum of
receive this information.
five seconds upon the next ignition switch cycle. An
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be displayed.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 480 STARTING AND OPERATING
Premium System – If Equipped Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
readings to the receiver module. four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) will display a graphic show-
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
ing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
pressure values in a different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
and to maintain the proper pressure.
message will also be displayed.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 481
message. Once the system receives the updated tire pres-
sures, the system will automatically update, the graphic
display in the EVIC will change color back to the original
color, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure 5
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
Tire Pressure Monitor Display also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC will display a
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
placard pressure value, as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ received.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 482 STARTING AND OPERATING
Light” will no longer flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
Tire Pressure Monitor Display housings.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 483
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system EVIC will still display a pressure value in a different
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be dis-
detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ played.
message is then followed with a graphic display with
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres-
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed. 5
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
NOTE: in place of the pressure value.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure 4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni- sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
tor the pressure in the compact spare tire. will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 484 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, following licenses:
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off United States MRXC4W4MA4
and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure Canada 2546A-C4W4MA4
value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure
is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the FUEL REQUIREMENTS
four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order This engine is designed to meet all emis-
for the TPMS to receive this information. sions regulations and provide excellent
General Information fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and line having an octane rating of 87. The use
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
following conditions: provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these
• This device may not cause harmful interference. engines.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 485
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to Reformulated Gasoline
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe-
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi- cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline prove air quality.
before considering service for the vehicle.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World- vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties 5
fuel system components.
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom- Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci- Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
fications if they are available. genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 486 STARTING AND OPERATING
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
CAUTION!
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso- line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
blends may result in starting and drivability prob- Warranty.
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi- fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a • Operate in a lean mode.
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
• Poor engine performance.
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may • Poor cold start and cold drivability.
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 487
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
E-85 perform the following: life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
• Change the engine oil and oil filter. of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
• Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
engine controller memory.
and California reformulated gasoline.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
Materials Added To Fuel
exposure to E-85 fuel. 5
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
MMT In Gasoline
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl) detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is conditions and they would result in additional cost.
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage fuel.
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 488 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! • The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s Most of these products contain high concentrations
performance: of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. mance problems resulting from the use of such
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor- fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
mance and damage the emissions control system. manufacturer.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune you.
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 489
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
monoxide poisoning: with all side windows fully open.
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as EQUIPPED
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
5
engine running for an extended period. If the E-85 General Information
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
running for more than a short period, adjust the hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un-
the vehicle. leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 490 STARTING AND OPERATING
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
CAUTION!
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
gasoline-only powered vehicles. operate on E-85.

E-85 Fuel Cap

E-85 Badge

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 491
Ethanol Fuel (E-85) For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternat-
ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom-
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
mended.
15% unleaded gasoline.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
WARNING! • You do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could refueling.
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok- • You drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov- least 5 miles (8 km).
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the 5
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
use it near an open flame. starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
Fuel Requirements
NOTE:
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
hard starting and rough idle following start up even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 492 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully Starting
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
Techron may be used. a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles until the engine is fully warmed up.
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu- beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient tempera-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included ture is less than 32°F (0°C).
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Cruising Range
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395 than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
contains additional requirements, developed during ex- consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to (mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 493
Replacement Parts ADDING FUEL
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure
patible parts. the replacement cap has been designed for use with this
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle. 5
Maintenance

CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 494 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
WARNING!
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door rein-
forcement. • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
CAUTION! being filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
running.
system could result from using an improper fuel
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the fuel system.
the ground while filling.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunc-
• Failure to follow this warning may result in serious
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
injury or death.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel NOTE:
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 495
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound. VEHICLE LOADING
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is indicated.
refueled.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
Vehicle Certification Label
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the 5
word “gASCAP” will display in the odometer. If this Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
is heard and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn The label contains the following information:
off the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started. • Name of manufacturer

A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap • Month and year of manufacture
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic • Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further infor-
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
mation.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 496 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
• Type of Vehicle
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH) rear GAWR.
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
WARNING!
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
GVWR.
control of the vehicle and have a collision.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 497
Overloading Loading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
front and rear GAWR. evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
it is not over the GVWR. Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way 5
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle the brakes operate.
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles. TRAILER TOWING
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and In this section you will find safety tips and information
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
GVWR. review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 498 STARTING AND OPERATING
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
follow the requirements and recommendations in this The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing. cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
Common Towing Definitions porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
you in understanding the following information:
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) supported by the scale.
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
and trailer when weighed in combination.
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 499
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) Frontal Area
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles maximum width of the front of a trailer.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear
Trailer Sway Control – Electronic
GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification La-
bel” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System/Trailer Sway
Control (TSC)” in “Starting and Operating” for further
WARNING! information.

It is important that you do not exceed the maximum Trailer Sway Control – Mechanical 5
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
control of the vehicle and have a collision. that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
Tongue Weight (TW) swaying motions while traveling.
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as
part of the load on your vehicle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 500 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Carrying Hitch Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements. Weight Dis-
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
tribution hitched are recommended for loads in excess of
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
5,000 lbs (2,268 kg).
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch WARNING!
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever- • An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used system may reduce handling, stability, braking
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the performance, and could result in a collision.
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used • Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro- with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing Vehicle dealer for additional information.
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 501
Trailer Hitch Classification Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
The following chart provides the industry standard for Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can Class IV - Extra Heavy 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the Duty
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
Class Max. Trailer Hitch In- drivetrain.
dustry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed 5
on your vehicle.
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 502 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain:

Engine/
GCWR (Gross Com- Max. GTW (Gross
Transmis- Frontal Area Max. Tongue Wt.
bined Wt. Rating) Trailer Wt.)
sion
2.4L/ 6,000 lbs (2 722 kg) 22 sq ft (2.0 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Auto- which includes up to
matic 5 persons & Luggage

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 503

Engine/
GCWR (Gross Com- Max. GTW (Gross
Transmis- Frontal Area Max. Tongue Wt.
bined Wt. Rating) Trailer Wt.)
sion
3.6L/ 7,300 lbs (3 311 kg) 32 sq ft (3.0 sq m) 2,500 lbs (1 134 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
Auto- which includes 1 to 2
matic persons & Luggage
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg) 32 sq ft (3.0 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
which includes 3 to 4
persons & Luggage
5
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg) 32 sq ft (3.0 sq m) 1,500 lbs (680 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
which includes 5 to 7 * Except for AWD
persons & Luggage models

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 504 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
• The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part
many trailer collisions.
of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety your bumper or trailer hitch.
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
• * For All Wheel Drive (AWD) models carrying 5 to 7
persons and luggage will exceed the rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) and therefore should not be
attempted.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 505
Consider the following items when computing the Towing Requirements
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
• The tongue weight of the trailer. train components the following guidelines are recom-
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment mended:
put in or on your vehicle.
CAUTION!
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or authorized dealer-installed
or other parts could be damaged. 5
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
options must be considered as part of the total load on
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information”
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
and cargo for your vehicle.
the heavier loads.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 506 STARTING AND OPERATING
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
WARNING! (Continued)
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further
information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the • When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
GAWR, or GCWR, ratings. overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-
WARNING! age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these • Safety chains must always be used between your
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
possible: the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
and that it will not shift during travel. When enough slack for turning corners.
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic • Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
driver to control. You could lose control of your the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
vehicle and have a collision. transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
(Continued) • GCWR must not be exceeded.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 507
– Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
WARNING! (Continued)
before trailer usage.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four – Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
ratings are not exceeded: before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
1. GVWR proper inspection procedure.
2. GTW – When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
3. GAWR mation” in “Starting and Operating” for information
on replacement tires and for the proper tire replace- 5
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
ment procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load
Towing Requirements – Tires carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limits.
– Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire. Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
– Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper- This could cause inadequate braking and possible
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures. personal injury.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 508 STARTING AND OPERATING
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
WARNING!
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with • Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
brake controller is not required. system and cause it to fail. You might not have
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over brakes when you need them and could have a
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of collision.
2,000 lbs (907 kg). • Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
CAUTION! tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) collision.
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 509
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness. 5
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Four-Pin Connector
Refer to the following illustrations. 1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 510 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, use
the Autostick® shift control to select a lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor-
Seven-Pin Connector mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn provide better engine braking.
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the trans-
mission fluid and filter as specified for “police, taxi, fleet,

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 511
or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the “Maintenance AutoStick®
Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. – When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the
NOTE: Check the transmission fluid level (four-speed highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
transmission only) before towing. The six-speed trans- avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if
mission does not require a fluid level check before the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or
towing. If, however, you notice fluid leakage or transmis- “2” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
sion malfunction, see your authorized dealer immedi- – To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
ately for assistance. driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to 5
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. conditions allow.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 512 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cooling System Highway Driving
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- Reduce speed.
heating, take the following actions:
Air Conditioning
City Driving
Turn off temporarily.
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground FWD Models AWD Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Recreational Towing – Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Mod- 4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
els – Automatic Transmission the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels 5. Release the parking brake.
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow CAUTION!
this procedure:
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following drivetrain will result.
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly. quirements can cause severe transmission damage. 5
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmis- der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
sion in PARK.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 514 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing – All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind an-
other vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
OFF the ground.

CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .517 ▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .517 ▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ 2.4L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 ▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE ▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 6
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .520
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ Spare Tire Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .538

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 516 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 ▫ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . .543
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .541 ▫ Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Without The Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 517
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel switch bank, above the climate controls. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for system adds heat to the engine cooling system and 6
other motorists. turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. to High. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers from the engine cooling system.
may wear down your battery.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 518 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2.4L Engine — If Equipped
CAUTION!
On hot days the engine oil temperature may become too
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage hot during sustained high-speed driving or if towing a
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” trailer up long grades. If this happens, a HOTOIL mes-
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle sage will flash in the odometer and the vehicle speed will
with the A/C turned off until the pointer drops back be reduced to 48 mph (77 km/h) maximum until the
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the engine oil temperature is reduced.
“H,” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the en-
gine OFF immediately, and call for service. NOTE: The maximum vehicle speed is reduced to
48 mph (77 km/h), you may reduce vehicle speed further
as needed. Once the engine oil temperature is reduced,
WARNING!
you may continue to drive normally.
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 519
Torque Specifications

Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/

Bolt Size Bolt
Socket
Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x 1.25 19 mm
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles. 6
Wheel Mounting Surface

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 520 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
WARNING!
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
Torque Patterns operating the jack or changing the wheel.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
(Continued)
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 521

WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to 6
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle Jack Storage Location
should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Spare Tire Location
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the
Jack Location vehicle and is held in place by means of a cable winch
mechanism.
The jack and jack-handle are stowed underneath a cover
in the rear storage bin in the cargo area.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 522 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jacking 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
example, if changing the right front
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
tire, block the left rear wheel.
areas.

WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when when the vehicle is being jacked.
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Spare Tire Removal
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. NOTE: On seven-passenger models, fold the third-row
3. Set the parking brake. passenger seats flat. This will provide more space when
accessing the jacking tools and when operating the winch
4. Place the shift lever in PARK . mechanism.
5. Turn OFF the ignition. 1. Remove the jack-handle components 1, 2 and 3 from
storage and assemble them.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 523
NOTE: Assemble components 2 and 3 by seating the
small ball at the end of component 2 in the small hole at
the end of component 3. This will lock these components
together. Assemble components 1 and 2 so that the wheel
nut socket at the end of component 1 faces upward when
seated on component 2. This will make it easier to rotate
the assembly when operating the winch mechanism.
2. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive
nut located in the jack storage area. Rotate the jack-
handle assembly counterclockwise until the spare tire
is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you
to pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle.
6
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
1 — Spare Tire Jack Handle
CAUTION!
2 — Extension 1
3 — Extension 2 The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and it can damage the winch.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 524 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle and Spare Tire Stowage
raise it upright so the tire’s tread is on the ground.
NOTE: Refer to “Spare Tire Removal” for information on
4. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and assembling the winch tools.
remove it from the center of the wheel.
1. Place the spare tire near to the winch cable. Hold the
spare upright so that the tire’s tread is on the ground
and the valve stem is at the top of the wheel facing
away from the rear of the vehicle.
2. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and drop
it through the center of the wheel. Then place the spare
tire with the cable and retainer underneath the vehicle.
3. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive
nut. Rotate the jack-handle assembly clockwise to
raise the spare tire into the storage area. Continue to
rotate the jack-handle assembly until you hear the
winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be over
Spare Tire Retainer
tightened. Push against the tire several times to be
sure it is held securely in place.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 525
Jacking Instructions
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
help prevent personal injury or damage to your you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
vehicle: service center where it can be raised on a lift.”
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
vehicle. • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. careful of motor traffic.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are 6
be raised. securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic valve stem facing the ground.
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 526 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Jack Warning Label

CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
Jacking Locations
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and jack-handle from
stowage.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel nuts counter-
clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 527
3. Place the jack in the notches underneath the lift area
that is closest to the flat tire. Center the jack saddle
between the drain flute formations on the sill flange.
Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack
saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.

6
Front Jack Engaged With Jack Handle

Front Jacking Location

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 528 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Rear Jacking Location Rear Jack Engaged With Jack Handle

4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise
with the jack handle. Raise the vehicle until the tire
just clears the road surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 529

WARNING! CAUTION!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
to remove the tire.

5. Remove the wheel nuts. For vehicles so equipped,

remove the wheel cover from the wheel by hand. Do
not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the
hub.
6
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.

6. Install the spare tire.

Mounting Spare Tire

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 530 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: 8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter-
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a clockwise with the jack handle.
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare. 9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
Spare” under “Tires — General Information” in leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings, each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this sec-
use, and operation. tion. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
7. Install the wheel nuts with the cone-shaped end of the dealer or service station.
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel nuts.
10. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
WARNING! 11. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area. Do not
stow the deflated tire in the spare tire stowage
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
location. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
replaced as soon as possible.
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 531
12. To stow the winch cable and retainer, fit the assembled Road Tire Installation
jack-handle over the winch drive nut. Rotate the jack-
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
handle assembly clockwise until you hear the winch
mechanism click three times. It cannot be over tight- 1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
ened.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
13. Stow the jack-handle and jack. Remove the wheel wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting studs
blocks from the vehicle and release the park brake. which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the lug
nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the
14. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Adjust the
wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
tire pressure as required.
WARNING!
6
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 532 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use
a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover result in personal injury.
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Mounting Stud
3 — Wheel Lug Nut 5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 533
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
WARNING!
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this sec- been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
tion. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them result in personal injury.
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or service station. 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly 4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
seated against the wheel. wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until 6
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers each nut has been tightened twice. For proper lug nut
1. Mount the road tire on the axle. torque refer to Torque Specifications in this secton. If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the dealer or service station.
lug nuts.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 534 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
CAUTION!
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel. Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
JUMP-STARTING than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump- alternator or electrical system may occur.
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster WARNING!
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and Preparations For Jump-Start
precautions.
The battery in your vehicle is located between the left
front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash
shield. To allow jump-starting, there are remote battery
posts located on the left side of the engine compartment.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 535

WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or 6
Remote Battery Posts sparks away from the battery.
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective Cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post 1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 536 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive Jump-Starting Procedure
(+) battery post. To remove the cover, press the locking
tab and pull upward on the cover. WARNING!
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. plosion.

WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
could establish a ground connection and personal
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
injury could result.
or the discharged vehicle.

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the

remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 537
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
negative (-) post of the booster battery. the reverse sequence:
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper 1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the dis-
the discharged battery. charged battery.
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
WARNING! from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) 3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri- cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific 4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable 6
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
parts. vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
(+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 538 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle, front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
you should have the battery and charging system in- and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator
spected at your authorized dealer. pedal. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure
that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning
CAUTION! the wheels or racing the engine.

Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets CAUTION!

draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
plugged in long enough without engine operation, transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from least one minute after every five rocking-motion
starting. cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 539
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in
⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
has been freed, press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
⬙ESC On⬙ mode. cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
CAUTION! ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 6
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result. If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels 1. Turn the engine OFF.
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring). 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 540 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Open the center console and remove the shift lever 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
override access cover (located in the front lower right
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar small tool into the
corner of the console storage bin).
access port, and push and hold the override release
lever forward.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.

Shift Lever Override Access Cover

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 541
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.

Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground FWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE IF transmission is NOT ALLOWED
operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h)
max speed 6
• 15 miles (24 km)
max distance
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 542 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
CAUTION!
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- • Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is Damage to the fascia will occur.
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to • When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers attach to front or rear suspension components.
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
vehicles under tow must be observed. towing.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) • Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
position, not the ACC position. mission may result.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Shift Lever ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON/RUN
Override” in this section for instructions on shifting the position, not in the LOCK/OFF position.
transmission out of PARK for towing.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 543
Without The Key Fob All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
with the ignition in the OFF position. Flatbed towing is OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
the preferred towing method. However, if a flatbed vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of vehicle raised and
towing vehicle is not available, wheel lift towing equip- the opposite end on a towing dolly.
ment may be used. Rear towing (with the front wheels on
the ground) is not allowed, as transmission damage will CAUTION!
occur. If rear towing is the only alternative, the front
wheels must be placed on a towing dolly. Proper towing Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. ments can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War- 6
ranty.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 544 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. 15 miles (24 km), it must be towed with the front
wheels OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, towing
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis- dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels
sion is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all raised).
four wheels on the ground) under the following condi-
tions: CAUTION!
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km). ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . .547 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .548 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .549 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .549 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND ▫ A/C Air Filter – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
7
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .552
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 ▫ Front Low/High Beam Headlamp, Turn
Signal/Park Lamp, And Side Marker Lamp . .598
▫ Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) – AWD Models
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581 ▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
▫ Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD Models ▫ Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp . . . . . . . .600
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
orrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND
▫ Cleaning The Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
▫ Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center) . .592
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L

7
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (4–Speed Only)
3 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 11 — Engine Oil Dipstick
6 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L

1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Air Cleaner Filter

2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Fill

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic further damage to the emission control system. It
transmission control systems. When these systems are could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- tests can be performed.
sions well within current government regulations. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the 7
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as word “gASCAP” will display in the odometer. If this
soon as possible. occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound
is heard and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn
off the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, which
may also turn on the MIL. you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. start this test over.

For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not of a normal bulb check.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system is ready for testing. happen:
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II • The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace- the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. not proceed to the I/M station.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully REPLACEMENT PARTS
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainte-
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, Limited Warranty.
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II DEALER SERVICE
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
may then indicate that the system is now ready. nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
available which include detailed service information for 7
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
attempting any procedure yourself.
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
penalties being assessed against you. services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
WARNING!
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
You can be badly injured working on or around a “Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a CAUTION!
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic. • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
CAUTION! (Continued)
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking engine oil level
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect
that protect the performance and durability of your reading.
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo- Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine, only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
transmission, power steering or air conditioning. the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle range markings on the dipstick. Either the range mark-
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of ings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a
component malfunction, use only the specified crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the
fluid for the flushing procedure. range and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding
1.0 qt (1.0 l) of oil when the reading is at the low end of
Engine Oil the range marking will raise the oil level to the high end
of the range marking.
7
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Selection
CAUTION!
For best performance and maximum protection under all
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill
cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil. American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is This symbol means that the oil has
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. been certified by the American
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa- Petroleum Institute (API). The
tion. manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
months, whichever occurs first.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi-
CAUTION!
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the should not be used.
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler
Engine Oil Viscosity – 2.4L Engine Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil® Helix® or equivalent. is recommended for all operating
or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating tem- temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
peratures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com- 7
the engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Com- partment” illustration in this section.
partment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
information. Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®,
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Synthetic Engine Oils Engine Oil Filter
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom- The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom- at every engine oil change.
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
Engine Oil Filter Selection
are followed.
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
Materials Added To Engine Oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi- of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. filter and are recommended.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, maintenance intervals.
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service sta-
tion or governmental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
Maintenance-Free Battery
WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine tenance required.
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment that is
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is located behind the left front fender and is accessible
near the engine compartment before starting the through the wheel well. The wheel and tire assemble do
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, not need to be removed to access the compartment.
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in Remote battery terminals are located in the engine com-
serious personal injury. partment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting Pro-
cedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection information.
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the 7
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be right and remove the access panel from the inner fender
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air shield.
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can • It is essential when replacing the cables on the
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid battery that the positive cable is attached to the
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean positive post and the negative cable is attached to
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme- (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
diately with large amounts of water. battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep terminal posts and free of corrosion.
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
a booster battery or any other booster source with vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
clamps to touch each other. use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
Air Conditioner Maintenance
WARNING!
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
at the start of each warm season. This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
time. unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
CAUTION! Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi- under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected 7
should be done by an experienced technician.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
WARNING!
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- operating or personal injury may result.
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
service be performed by authorized dealer or other the glove box. Perform the following steps to replace the
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. filter:
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system 1. Open the glove box and remove all contents.
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
2. Push the retaining tab on each side of the glove box
A/C Air Filter – If Equipped inward while gently pulling the glove box door out-
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper ward until both tabs clear the door opening in the
maintenance intervals. instrument panel.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561

Glove Box Removal A/C Air Filter Replacement

3. Pivot the glove box downward. 5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of 7
the housing.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter Body Lubrication
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
cover. tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
CAUTION! MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy opera-
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to tion and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
to install the filter properly will result in the need to be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
replace it more often. excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
7. Reinstall the glove box door. Make sure that the hinges nents to ensure proper function. When performing other
are seated fully as you raise the door. Otherwise, the underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
door latch will not align properly. and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563
Windshield Wiper Blades Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the 1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula- liftgate glass.
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
7
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions 1 — Wiper Arm
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces- 2 — Pivot Cap
sary.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully up-
ward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
blade holder.

1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm
4 — Wiper Blade Holder

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
the wiper blade until it snaps into place. exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
containers.
place.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer
Adding Washer Fluid fluid when the message “LoWASH” appears in the
The windshield washer and the rear window washer instrument cluster.
share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the WARNING!
fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator Commercially available windshield washer solvents
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
flush out the residual water. must be exercised when filling or working around 7
the washer solution.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust System
WARNING!
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust • Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
system. carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex- information.
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam- • A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams over materials that can burn. Such materials might
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. tact anything that can burn.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
CAUTION!
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un- portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control damage.
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor- NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
mance and cause serious damage to the engine. systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your against you.
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica- 7
resulting in possible damage to the converter and tions, should be obtained immediately.
vehicle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Cooling System
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, WARNING!
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in • When working near the radiator cooling fan,
motion. disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the switch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera-
vehicle. ture controlled and can start at any time the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
Coolant Checks Cooling System — Drain, Flush, And Refill
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, MS-12106).
flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
maintenance intervals.
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add cool-
face of the condenser. ant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
needed to be added to the system please contact your
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
local authorized dealer.
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for 7
leaks. Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en- coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
damage and may decrease corrosion protection. be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool- may plug the radiator.
ant is different and should not be mixed with • This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en- propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat- Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine tifreeze) is not recommended.
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571
Adding Coolant • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concen-
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that allows
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle. will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
dard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where 7
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant the vehicle is operated.
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
WARNING!
needed to be added to the system please contact your • The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
local authorized dealer. cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom- Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pres-
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with sure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
possible. while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
Cooling System Pressure Cap specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine gine damage may result.
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant 3.6L Engine – the level of the coolant in the pressurized
coolant bottle should be between the “COLD” and
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
“FULL” range on the bottle when the engine is cold.
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani- no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant (anti-
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in freeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When
spills immediately. additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to main-
tain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
Coolant Level
bottle. Do not overfill.
2.4L Engine – the coolant bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is ad- 7
equate. With the engine idling and warm to normal
operating temperature, the level of the coolant in the
bottle should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines,
shown on the bottle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Points To Remember • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
for leaks.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- MS-12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. ponents.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
bottle must also be protected against freezing. the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575
Brake System Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
forming underhood services.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
maintenance intervals. to the requirements described on the brake fluid reser-
voir.
WARNING!
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and cause leaking in the system.
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
possible brake damage. You would not have your full leak and a checkup may be needed.
braking capacity in an emergency. 7
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
if the “Brake Warning Light” indicates system failure.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely This could result in a collision.
damage your brake system and/or impair its perfor- • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
mance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
is also identified on the original factory installed the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the This could result in a collision.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577
Automatic Transmission
CAUTION! (Continued)
Selection Of Lubricant shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifica-
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. tions.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain Special Additives
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used any special additives in the transmission.
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
be used.
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
CAUTION!
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
7
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac- policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter adversely affect seals.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi-
CAUTION!
tion (allowing time for the transmission to fully en-
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as gage in each position), ending with the transmission in
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo- PARK.
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New 5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to prevent dirt
Vehicle Limited Warranty. from entering the transmission.
Fluid Level Check – Four-Speed Automatic 6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
Transmission or cold. You can also read the transmission fluid
Use the following procedure to check the transmission temperature using the Vehicle Information display in
fluid level properly: the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
the instrument cluster. Refer to ⬙Electronic Vehicle
1. Park the vehicle on level ground. Information Center (EVIC)⬙ in ⬙Understanding Your
2. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60 Instrument Panel⬙ for further information. Hot fluid is
seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of approximately 180°F (82°C), which is the normal op-
this procedure. erating temperature after the vehicle is driven at least
15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held comfortably
3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a temperature
pedal. of approximately 80°F (27°C).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579
7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert it until seated. NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
Then, remove the dipstick and note the fluid level on the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there between the two COLD (lower) holes on the dipstick
is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick. with the fluid at approximately 80°F (27°C). If the fluid
Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid level is correctly established at 80°F (27°C), it should be
if the actual level is at or above the hole. between the HOT (upper) reference holes when the
• If the fluid is hot, the fluid level should be in the transmission reaches 180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the up- check the level at the normal operating temperature.
per two holes in the dipstick). 8. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
• If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.”
If the fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick
tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. After 7
adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait
at least two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the
transmission before rechecking the fluid level.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Level Check – Six-Speed Automatic
CAUTION!
Transmission
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac- The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
in transmission shift quality and/or torque con- fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmis-
verter shudder, and will require more frequent sion filler tube is capped and no dipstick is provided. Your
fluid and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubri- authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level
cants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid using a special service dipstick. If you notice fluid leakage or
specifications. transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer im-
• Dirt and water in the transmission can cause seri- mediately to have the transmission fluid level checked.
ous damage. To prevent dirt and water from enter- Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
ing the transmission after checking or replenishing severe transmission damage.
fluid, make sure that the dipstick cap is re-seated
properly. CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581
Fluid And Filter Changes Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper Frequency Of Fluid Change
maintenance intervals.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid maintenance intervals.
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans-
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD Models Only
mission is disassembled for any reason.
Lubricant Selection
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) – AWD Models Only
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
Lubricant Selection
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-
Fluid Level Check
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If 7
Fluid Level Check leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing the
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the
leakage is detected, check the fluid level by removing the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 in (4 mm) below the fill hole.
fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 in (4 mm) below the fill hole.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequency Of Fluid Change The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
resistance built into your vehicle.
maintenance intervals.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads The most common causes are:
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly • Stone and gravel impact.
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, • Insects, tree sap and tar.
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme • Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under- • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
body protection.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
Washing
CAUTION!
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
clear water. scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove. Special Care
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. a month.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of 7
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives
the owner.
or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND
packaged and sealed. WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
CAUTION!
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
match the color of your vehicle. or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly tective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. equivalent is recommended.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — Interior Care
Equipped Instrument Panel Cover
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
with a clean, dry towel. use protectants or other products, which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
restore the low glare surface.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
Cleaning Interior Trim
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR® Total Clean or equiva-
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
lent, then MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or 7
Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent to
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of clean vinyl upholstery
protectants on Stain Repel products.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
WARNING!
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery. Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and Cleaning Headlights
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR®
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-
Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid
age than glass headlights.
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do
not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather uphol- different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
stery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- directly on the mirror.
lowed by rinsing.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Glass Surfaces must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win- rag.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
2. Dry with a soft cloth. 7
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
scratch the elements.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Maintenance FUSES
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. WARNING!
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. • When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
cloth. fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the injury, fire and/or property damage.
buckles do not work properly. • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
Cleaning The Cupholders is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent. • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.

(Continued)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589

WARNING! (Continued) Car-

Mini-
Cavity tridge Description
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air Fuse
Fuse
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system F102 20 Amp Cigar Lighter in
blows, contact an authorized dealer. Yellow Instrument Panel/
Left Rear Power
Interior Fuses Outlet
The interior fuse panel is located on the passenger side F103 20 Amp Power Outlet in
under the instrument panel. Yellow Console Bin/Power
Outlet in Rear of
Car- Console
Mini-
Cavity tridge Description F105 20 Amp Heated Seats – If
Fuse
Fuse Yellow Equipped 7
F100 30 Amp 110V AC Inverter – F106 20 Amp Rear Power Outlet
Pink If Equipped Yellow
F101 10 Amp Interior Lights F107 10 Amp Rear Camera – If
Red Red Equipped

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Car- Car-
Mini- Mini-
Cavity tridge Description Cavity tridge Description
Fuse Fuse
Fuse Fuse
F108 15 Amp Instrument Panel F117 10 Amp Heated Mirrors
Blue Red
F109 10 Amp Climate Control/ F118 10 Amp Occupant Restraint
Red HVAC Red Controller
F110 10 Amp Occupant Restraint F119 10 Amp Steering Column
Red Controller Red Control Module
F112 10 Amp Spare F120 10 Amp All Wheel Drive –
Red Red If Equipped
F114 20 Amp Rear HVAC F121 15 Amp Wireless Ignition
Yellow Blower/Motor Blue Node
F115 20 Amp Rear Wiper Motor F122 25 Amp Driver Door
Yellow Natural Module
F116 30 Amp Rear Defroster F123 25 Amp Passenger Door
Pink (EBL) Natural Module

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591

Car- Car-
Mini- Mini-
Cavity tridge Description Cavity tridge Description
Fuse Fuse
Fuse Fuse
F124 10 Amp Mirrors F130 15 Amp Climate Control/
Red Blue Instrument Panel
F125 10 Amp Steering Column F131 10 Amp Passenger
Red Control Module Red Assistance/Hands
F126 10 Amp Audio Amplifier Free System – If
Red Equipped
F127 20 Amp Trailer Tow – If F132 10 Amp Tire Pressure
Yellow Equipped Red Module
F128 15 Amp Radio F133 10 Amp Spare
Blue Red 7
F129 15 Amp Video/DVD – If
Blue Equipped

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center) Car-
Mini-
The power distribution center is located in the engine Cavity tridge Description
Fuse
compartment. Fuse
F101 60 Amp Interior Power
Yellow Distribution Center
Rail
F102 60 Amp Interior Power
Yellow Distribution Center
Rail
F103 60 Amp Interior Power
Yellow Distribution Center
Rail
F105 60 Amp Interior Power
Yellow Distribution Center
Power Distribution Center Rail Ignition Run
Relay

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593

Car- Car-
Mini- Mini-
Cavity tridge Description Cavity tridge Description
Fuse Fuse
Fuse Fuse
F106 60 Amp Interior Power Dis- F144 40 Amp Exterior Lights 2
Yellow tribution Center Green
Rail Run/Accessory F145 30 Amp To Body Computer
Relays Pink – Lamp
F139 40 Amp Climate Control F146 30 Amp Spare
Green System Blower Pink
F140 30 Amp Power Locks F147 30 Amp Spare
Pink Pink
F141 40 Amp Anti-Lock Brake F148 40 Amp Radiator Fan Motor
Green System Green 7
F142 40 Amp Glow Plugs – If F149 30 Amp Starter Solenoid
Green Equipped Pink
F143 40 Amp Exterior Lights 1 F150 25 Amp Powertrain Control
Green Natural Modules

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Car- Car-
Mini- Mini-
Cavity tridge Description Cavity tridge Description
Fuse Fuse
Fuse Fuse
F151 30 Amp Headlamp Washer F158 10 Amp Active Hood Mod-
Pink Motor – If Red ule – If Equipped
Equipped F159 10 Amp Spare
F152 25 Amp Diesel Fuel Heater Red
Natural – If Equipped F160 20 Amp Interior Lights
F153 20 Amp Fuel Pump Yellow
Yellow F161 20 Amp Horn
F156 10 Amp Brake/Electronic Yellow
Red Stability Control F162 50 Amp Cabin Heater #1/
Module Red Vacuum Pump – If
F157 10 Amp Power Tranfer Unit Equipped
Red Module – If F163 50 Amp Cabin Heater #2 –
Equipped Red If Equipped

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595

Car- Car-
Mini- Mini-
Cavity tridge Description Cavity tridge Description
Fuse Fuse
Fuse Fuse
F164 25 Amp Powertrain Auto F170 15 Amp Emissions – Partial
Natural Shutdown Blue Zero Emissions
F165 20 Amp Powertrain Vehicle Actuators
Yellow Shutdown F172 20 Amp Spare
F166 20 Amp Spare Yellow
Yellow F173 25 Amp Anti Lock Brake
F167 30 Amp Powertrain Natural Valves
Green Shutdown F174 20 Amp Siren – If Equipped
F168 10 Amp Air Conditioner Yellow
Red Clutch F175 30 Amp Spare 7
F169 40 Amp Emissions – Partial Green
Green Zero Emissions F176 10 Amp Powertrain Control
Vehicle Motor Red Modules

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Car- REPLACEMENT BULBS

Mini-
Cavity tridge Description
Fuse Interior Bulbs
Fuse
F177 20 Amp All Wheel Drive Bulb Number
Yellow Module – If Courtesy/Reading 578
Equipped Lamps (Incandescent)
F178 25 Amp Sunroof – If Courtesy/Reading LED (Serviced at
Natural Equipped Lamps (Optional LED) Authorized Dealer)
F179 10 Amp Battery Sensor Glove Box Lamp 194
Red Cargo Lamp 579
F181 100 Electrohydraulic Optional Door Map LED (Serviced at
Amp Steering (EHPS) – If Pocket/Cupholder Authorized Dealer)
Blue Equipped
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for
F182 50 Amp Cabin Heater #3 – replacement instructions.
Red If Equipped
F184 30 Amp Front Wiper Motor
Pink

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
Exterior Bulbs Exterior Bulbs – Rear (LED Version)
Bulb Number Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamp 9006 Rear Tail/Stop Lamp LED (Serviced at
High Beam Headlamp 9005 Authorized Dealer)
Front Park/Turn Signal 3757AK Rear Tail (Liftgate) Lamp LED (Serviced at
Side Marker Lamp 168 Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp PSX24W Rear Turn Signal Lamp WY21W
Center High Mounted LED (Serviced at Backup Lamp W21W
Stop Lamp (CHMSL) Authorized Dealer)
Exterior Bulbs – Rear (Bulb Version)
License Lamp 168
Bulb Number
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn P27/7W 7
Signal Lamp
Rear Tail (Liftgate) Lamp P27/7W
Backup Lamp P27/7W

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Front Low/High Beam Headlamp, Turn
Signal/Park Lamp, And Side Marker Lamp
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner
filter housing and position the Totally Integrated Power 1 — Front Turn Signal/Park Lamp Bulb
Module (TIPM) aside to replace certain lamps in the left 2 — Side Marker Lamp Bulb
headlamp housing. 3 — Low Beam Headlamp Bulb
4 — High Beam Headlamp Bulb
2. Rotate the applicable bulb and connector assembly ¼
turn counterclockwise and remove the assembly from 3. Disconnect the bulb from the harness connector and
the headlamp housing. then connect the replacement bulb.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
2. Remove the electrical connector from the fog lamp
CAUTION!
housing.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.

4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the

headlamp housing and rotate it ¼ turn clockwise to
lock it in place.
Front Fog Lamp
NOTE: Turn the steering wheel to the right if replacing
the left front fog lamp or to the left if replacing the right 7
front fog lamp to allow for easier access to the front of the Front Fog Lamp Electrical Connector
wheel well. 3. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and
1. Remove the fasteners retaining the front lower wheel pull straight out from the fog lamp.
well access panel and remove the access panel.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Changing The Rear Turn Signal Lamp
CAUTION!
1. Open the liftgate.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the 2. Remove the two fasteners from the inboard side of the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the tail lamp housing.
bulb with rubbing alcohol.

4. Install the replacement bulb and connector assembly

straight into the fog lamp until it locks into place.
5. Reinstall the front lower wheel well access panel and
fasteners.
Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp
The tail lamps are a two-piece design. The tail/stop/rear
turn signal lamps are located in the rear corner body
panels. The tail and backup lamps are located in the
liftgate.
Inboard Tail Lamp Housing Fasteners

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool) Changing The Backup Lamp
between the body panel and the outboard side of the
1. Open the liftgate.
tail lamp housing with one hand and grasp the flange
on the inboard side of the tail lamp housing with the 2. Remove the two fasteners retaining the tail lamp
other hand. Use the trim stick and hand pressure housing to the liftgate from the inboard face of the
together to disengage the tail lamp housing from the liftgate.
vehicle.
4. Rotate the applicable bulb’s electrical connector ¼ turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the tail lamp
housing.
5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the tail
7
lamp housing and rotate the connector ¼ turn clock-
wise to lock it in place.
7. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and fasteners.
Tail Lamp Housing Retainers

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool) 5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
between the tail lamp housing and the liftgate. Use the the replacement bulb.
trim stick and hand pressure together to disengage the
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
tail lamp housing from the liftgate.
housing and rotate the connector ¼ turn clockwise to
lock it in place.
7. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and fasteners.
License Plate Lamp
1. Push the small locking tab sticking out of the end of
the lens toward the side of the vehicle and hold it in
that position.

Tail Gate Lamp

4. Rotate the applicable bulb’s electrical connector ¼ turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the housing.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
3. Hold the lens with one hand and rotate the bulb’s
electrical connector ¼ turn counterclockwise with the
other hand and then separate the bulb and connector
assembly from the lens.
4. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
5. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the lens
and rotate the connector ¼ turn clockwise to lock it in
place.
6. Insert the end of the lens without the locking tab into
License Lamp the housing on the liftgate and then push the opposite
end of the lens into the housing, making sure it locks
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool between the end of the
in the housing.
7
lens with the locking tab and the surrounding housing
and then pivot the tool to separate the lens from the
housing.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models 20.5 Gallons 77.6 Liters
All-Wheel Drive Models 21 Gallons 79.8 Liters

Engine Oil With Filter

2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 4.5 Quarts 4.26 Liters
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters

Cooling System*
2.4L Engine and Single or Dual-Zone Climate Control System 10.7 Quarts 10.1 Liters
(MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
2.4L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System (MOPAR® 11.6 Quarts 11.0 Liters
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605

U.S. Metric
3.6L Engine and Single or Dual-Zone Climate Control System 13.1 Quarts 12.4 Liters
(MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
3.6L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System (MOPAR® 14.5 Quarts 13.7 Liters
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology). 7
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as
MOPAR, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as
MOPAR, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection 87 Octane

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
Chassis

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Automatic Transmission Use only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Failure to use ATF+4® fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
We recommend MOPAR® ATF+4® fluid.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) We recommend you use MOPAR® Gear Lubricant 75W-90.
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) We recommend you use MOPAR® Gear Lubricant 75W-90.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid + 4, or
MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid. 7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 M
A
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES I
N
T
E
CONTENTS N
A
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610 ▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 M 610 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
N in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
T Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
E indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
N remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
A scheduled maintenance. message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
N
C scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indi- your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring
E
cator message will illuminate. This means that service is to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle Information
S required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in “Understanding
C frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambi- Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster
H
E ent temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Understanding
D the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
U displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
L change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
E
S (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). whichever comes first.
8
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Severe Duty All Models
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis- Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound, operated in a dusty and off road environment. This type of
indicating that an oil change is necessary. vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 611 M
A
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil I
Change Indicator System: N
• Check engine oil level. T
• Change oil and filter. E
• Check windshield washer fluid level. N
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu- A
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator N
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, system turns on. C
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on. E
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake required. S
C
master cylinder, power steering and transmission • Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped H
(2.4L engine only) and fill as needed. with dipstick. E
D
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights • Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses U
and park brake. L
Required Maintenance Intervals. E
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and S
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following hoses. 8
page for the required maintenance intervals. • Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 M 612 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Maintenance Chart
N
T Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
E pages for the required maintenance intervals.
N
A

100,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000
110,000
Mileage or time passed
20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000
N
C (whichever comes first)
E
S Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
C
128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000
112,000

Or Kilometers:
32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

H
E
D
U Additional Inspections
L
E Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
S Inspect front suspension, tie rod
X X X X X X X
8 ends, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, parking
X X X X X X X
brake function.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 613 M
A
I

100,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000
110,000
Mileage or time passed
20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000
(whichever comes first) N
T
E
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 N
A

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

N
C
E
Additional Maintenance S
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X C
Replace air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X H
E
Replace spark plugs D
X X X X X
(2.4L Engine). ** U
Replace spark plugs L
X E
(3.6L Engine). ** S
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or
8
X X
150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 M 614 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I

100,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000
110,000
Mileage or time passed
20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000
N (whichever comes first)
T
E
N Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
A

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

N
C
E
S Change the automatic transmis-
X
C sion fluid and filter.
H Change the automatic transmis-
E sion fluid and filter if using your
D vehicle for any of the following: X
U police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
L
E trailer towing.
S Replace rear drive assembly
X X
8 (RDA) fluid.
Replace power transfer unit
X X
(PTU) fluid.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
X
necessary

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 615 M
A
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, I
yearly intervals do not apply. N
T
E
WARNING! N
A
• You can be badly injured working on or around a N
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you C
E
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a S
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me- C
H
chanic. E
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve- D
hicle could result in a component malfunction and U
L
effect vehicle handling and performance. This E
could cause an accident. S
8

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .619 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .623
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .620 ▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .620
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
▫ In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621 9
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .624

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 618 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 619
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests
YOUR VEHICLE If you list a number of items and you must have your
Prepare For The Appointment vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
work to be performed may not be covered by the
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
for an appointment.
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality 9
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 620 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process. P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance. Phone: (800) 423–6343

• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 621
In Mexico Contact: Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
Mexico, D. F. a Bell Relay Service operator.

In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Service Contract

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Impaired (TDD/TTY) Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni- manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter have any questions about the service contract, call the
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY. Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 9
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 622 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
WARNING!
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser- vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, known to the State of California to cause cancer and
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
contract documents, and contact the person listed in products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
those documents. cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
We appreciate that you have made a major investment and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and WARRANTY INFORMATION
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
concerns.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 623
MOPAR® PARTS To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom- or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
operating at its best. Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other infor-
mation about motor vehicle safety from http://
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS www.safercar.gov.
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy cam- roadsafety/
paign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in indi-
vidual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and 9
the manufacturer.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 624 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
To order the following manuals, you may use either the Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas- charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac- make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
for an order form. features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes). ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain- assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, Included are starting, operating, emergency and mainte-
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 625
Call toll free at: Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada) conditions on a specified government test course. For
Or example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
• www.techauthority.com actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
TIRE QUALITY GRADES teristics and climate.
The following tire grading categories were established by Traction Grades
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle. pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. 9
requirements in addition to these grades.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 626 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance,
WARNING!
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
Temperature Grades
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory heat buildup and possible tire failure.
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INDEX

10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 628 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .571 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .556 Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559 Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559 Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INDEX 629
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .271 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Back-Up Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . .105
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .24 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 630 INDEX
Caps, Filler Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .302
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Cleaning
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Cargo Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Rollaway Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Tri-Fold Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Connector
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INDEX 631
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .373 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621 Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .572 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571 Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573 Dipsticks
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582 Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 632 INDEX
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .252
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Emergency, In Case of
Driving Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy. . . . . .321 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . . .350 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .550
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .271 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .240 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INDEX 633
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Euro Twin Clutch Transmission
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556 Fabric Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 Filters
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Flashers
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 634 INDEX
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .605
Flexible Fuel Vehicles Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Fluid Leaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Fluid Level Checks Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INDEX 635
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Hazard

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Gasoline (Fuel) Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Headlights
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Gauges Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 636 INDEX
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . .257
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .230
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition
.228
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
.225
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
.227
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
.122
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
.202
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
.230
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Hitches Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .233

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INDEX 637
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Latches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520 Latch Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Knee Bolster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 638 INDEX
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .302
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .447 Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .232
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .302
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INDEX 639
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .302 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .302
Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 Manual Transaxle
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 640 INDEX
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Mode Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INDEX 641
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .271
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Passenger Seat Back Tilt (Easy Entry System). . . . . .219 Power Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Pretensioners
Phone (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .457 Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .21
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .572
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 642 INDEX
Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581 Remote Control
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Rear Drive Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .374
Rear Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Reclining Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560 Reverse Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INDEX 643
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623 Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Reclining Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .56 Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 644 INDEX
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .302 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Steering
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Specifications Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .374
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INDEX 645
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .66 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .457 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 646 INDEX
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504 Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 Transaxle
Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541 Transmission
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .512 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .24
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .257
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .21
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .21
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INDEX 647
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .18
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Uconnect® (Hands-Free Phone)
Making A Phone Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .302
Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592 Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .373 Washer
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585 Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 648 INDEX
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Wiper, Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT
ons are incorporated into this vehi- The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed
rovide immunity to radio frequency away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully
dios and telephone equipment must shielded coaxial cable.
ined personnel. The following must
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a
tion.
low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
tion should be made directly to the
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal
e to the battery as possible. The
may require special precautions.
should be made to body sheet metal
attery connection. This connection All installations should be checked for possible interference
between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.
s should be mounted on the roof or
. Care should be used in mounting
s. Magnets may affect the accuracy
s on vehicles so equipped.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chrysler Group LLC
14D482-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine